INGLÊS

GRAMÁTICA

5ª Edição – 2017
Curso Preparatório Cidade - SCLN 113 Bloco C - Salas 207/210 Tel.: 3340-0433 / 9975-4464 / 8175-4509 - www.cursocidade.com.br / cursocidade@gmail.com
EQ U I P E
Diretor Geral
Luiz Alberto Tinoco Cidade
Diretora Executiva
Clara Marisa May
Diretor de Artes
Fabiano Rangel Cidade
Coordenação Geral dos Cursos Preparatórios
Profº Luiz Alberto Tinoco Cidade
Coordenação dos Cursos de Idiomas EAD
Profº Dr. Daniel Soares Filho
Secretaria
Evelin Drunoski Mache
Suporte
Laura Maciel Cruz
Jefferson de Araújo
Geraldo Luís da Silva Júnior
Editoração Gráfica
Edilva de Lima do Nascimento
Fonoaudióloga e Psicopedagoga
Mariana Ramos – CRFa 12482-RJ/T-DF
Assessoria Jurídica
Luiza May Schmitz – OAB/DF – 24.164
Assessoria de Línguas Estrangeiras
Cleide Thieves (Poliglota-EEUU)
João Jorge Gonçalves (Poliglota-Europa)
Equipe de Professores
Professores dos Idiomas
Luiz Cidade – Espanhol
Maristella Mattos Silva – Espanhol (EAD)
Monike Cidade – Espanhol (EAD)
Genildo da Silva – Espanhol
Leonardo dos Santos – Espanhol
Diego Fernandes – Espanhol
Rita de Cássia de Deus Vindo - Inglês
Márcia Mattos da Silva – Francês (EAD)
Marcos Henrique – Francês
Professores dos Concursos
Drº Adriano Andrade – Geografia do Brasil
Gibrailto Soares - Geografia do Brasil (EAD)
Drº Daniel Soares Filho – Espanhol (EAD)
Drª Simone Tostes – Inglês (EAD)
Edson Antonio S. Gomes – Administração de Empresas
Tomé de Souza – Administração de Empresas (EAD)
Sormany Fernandes – História do Brasil
Djalma Augusto – História do Brasil
André Luís Gonçalves – História
Felício Mourão Freire – História Geral (EAD)
Albert Iglésias – Língua Portuguesa e Literatura
Valber Freitas Santos – Gramática, Redação e Literatura (EAD)
Alexandre Santos de Oliveira – Direito
Lúcio dos Santos Ferreira – Direito
Emerson Marques Lima – Direito
Ms Edson da Costa Rodrigues – Ciências Contábeis
Genilson Vaz Silva Sousa – Ciências Contábeis
Paulo Augusto Moreira – Ciências Contábeis
Anderson Silva de Aguiar – Ciências Contábeis
Jorge Basílio – Matemática Financeira
Ricardo Sant'Ana – Informática
Cláudio Lobo – Informática
Eliel Martins – Informática
Cintia Lobo César – Enfermagem
Elaine Moretto – Enfermagem (EAD)
 7.1. COMPARATIVE DEGREE ...................................................................................... 26
Conteúdo
1. ALPHABET.............................................................................................................. 8 7.2. SUPERLATIVE DEGREE ....................................................................................... 27

2. NUMBERS .............................................................................................................. 8 8. ORDER AND CATEGORY OF ADJECTIVES ............................................................... 28

2.1 NUMERALS ........................................................................................................... 8 9. VERB TO BE ......................................................................................................... 29

2.2. ORDINALS ........................................................................................................... 9 9.1. PRESENT ........................................................................................................... 29

3. ARTICLE ............................................................................................................... 11 9.2. PAST.................................................................................................................. 29

3.1. INDEFINITE ARTICLE: A or AN ............................................................................ 11 9.3. FUTURE ............................................................................................................. 30

3.2. DEFINITE ARTICLE: THE ..................................................................................... 11 10. PRESENT TENSE............................................................................................... 30

4. PLURAL ................................................................................................................. 15 10.1. SIMPLE PRESENT CONTINUOUS........................................................................ 30

4.1. MAIN RULE ......................................................................................................... 15 10. 2 SIMPLE PRESENT ............................................................................................. 31

4.2. OTHER SPECIFIC USES ....................................................................................... 16 10.3. PRESENT PERFECT ........................................................................................... 31

4.3. COMPOUND NOUNS ............................................................................................ 16 10.4. PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS ..................................................................... 32

4.4. SOME IRREGULARS............................................................................................. 16 11. PAST TENSE ..................................................................................................... 35

4.5. THE SAME AS IN LATIN OR GREEK ...................................................................... 17 11.1. SIMPLE PAST.................................................................................................... 35

4.6. THE SAME AS SINGULAR ..................................................................................... 17 11.2. PAST CONTINUOUS .......................................................................................... 36

5. PRONOUNS ........................................................................................................... 19 11.3. PAST PERFECT ................................................................................................. 37

5.1 SUBJECT PRONOUNS ........................................................................................... 19 11.4. PAST PERFECT CONTINUOUS ........................................................................... 38

5.2 OBJECT PRONOUNS ............................................................................................. 20 EXERCISES ........................................................................................................... 38

5.3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADJECTIVES) ............................................... 20 12. FUTURE ........................................................................................................... 40

5.4. QUANTIFIERS (QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES) ...................................................... 20 12.1. SIMPLE FUTURE ............................................................................................... 41

5.5. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES...................................... 21 12.2. FUTURE CONTINUOUS ..................................................................................... 41

5.6. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ....................................................................................... 21 12.3. FUTURE PERFECT ............................................................................................. 42

5.7. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADVERBS) ..................................................... 22 12.4. FUTURE PERFECT CONTINUOUS ....................................................................... 42

6. NOUNS ................................................................................................................. 25 1. ADVERBS.............................................................................................................. 47

6.1. GENRE................................................................................................................ 25 1.1. FREQUENCY ....................................................................................................... 47

6.2. CATEGORY ......................................................................................................... 25 1.2. MANNER ............................................................................................................ 48

6.3. FORMS ............................................................................................................... 26 1.3. TIME .................................................................................................................. 48

7. ADJECTIVES .......................................................................................................... 26 1.4. PLACE ................................................................................................................ 49

 1.5. DEGREE OR INTENSITY ...................................................................................... 49
1.6. DOUBT ............................................................................................................... 49
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 51
2. PREPOSITIONS ..................................................................................................... 52
2.1. GENERAL PREPOSITIONS .................................................................................... 52
2.1.1. The preposition IN is applied to the following situations. ............................... 52
2.1.2. The preposition ON is applied to the following situations. .............................. 53
2.1.3. The preposition AT is applied to the following situations. ............................... 54
2.1.4. The preposition FOR is applied to the following situations. ............................. 54
2.1.5. The preposition BY is applied to the following situations. ............................... 55
2.2 PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE .................................................................................... 55
2.3. PREPOSITIONS OF DIRECTION ........................................................................... 56
2.4. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME ..................................................................................... 56
2.5. PREPOSITIONS OF POSSESSION ......................................................................... 56
2.6. PREPOSITIONS OF WAY ...................................................................................... 56
2.7. OTHER PREPOSITIONS ....................................................................................... 56
3. CONJUNCTIONS .................................................................................................... 57
3.1. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS ........................................................................ 57
3.2. SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 58
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 60
4. MODAL VERBS ...................................................................................................... 60
4.1. MODAL EXPRESSIONS......................................................................................... 61
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 63
5. WISH .................................................................................................................... 64
6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES ........................................................ 67
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 68
7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES ............................................................................... 69
7.1. ACTIVE VOICE .................................................................................................... 69
7.2. PASSIVE VOICE .................................................................................................. 70
EXERCISE: ............................................................................................................ 71
8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES ............................................................................. 72
8.1. DIRECT SPEECH ................................................................................................. 72
8.2. INDIRECT SPEECH ............................................................................................. 72
8.3. INDIRECT QUESTIONS ....................................................................................... 73
8. APPOSITIVE ......................................................................................................... 75
1. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE .................................................................................... 76
1.1. SUBJECT ............................................................................................................ 76
1. 1.1 FORMS OF SUBJECT .................................................................................... 76
1.2. PREDICATE ........................................................................................................ 77
1.3. SUBJECT COMPLEMENT ...................................................................................... 77
2. OBJECTS OF SENTENCE ........................................................................................ 77
2.1. DIRECT OBJECT ................................................................................................. 77
2.2 INDIRECT OBJECT............................................................................................... 78
2.3. OBJECTS OF PREPOSITIONS............................................................................... 78
3. VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES............................................ 78
3.1. INFINITIVE ........................................................................................................ 78
3.1.1. INFINITIVE PHRASE .................................................................................... 79
3.1.2. ABOUT PUNCTUATION ................................................................................ 79
3.1.3. INFINITIVE VERB FORMS ............................................................................ 80
3.2. GERUNDS .......................................................................................................... 80
3.2.1. GERUND AS SUBJECT .................................................................................. 81
3.2.2. GERUND AS DIRECT OBJECT ....................................................................... 81
3.2.3. GERUND AS SUBJECT COMPLEMENT............................................................ 81
3.2.4. GERUND AS OBJECT OF PREPOSITION ........................................................ 81
3.2.5. GERUND PHRASE ........................................................................................ 81
3.3. PARTICIPLES...................................................................................................... 82
4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES ........................................... 84
5. MAIN CLAUSE ....................................................................................................... 88
6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE ......................................................................................... 89
6.1. NOUN CLAUSE .................................................................................................... 89
6.1.1. AS SUBJECT ................................................................................................ 89
6.1.2. AS DIRECT OBJECT ..................................................................................... 89
6.1.3. SUBORDINATORS IN NOUN CLAUSES........................................................... 89
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 90
6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE ............................................................................................ 91
6.2.1. RELATIVE PRONOUNS ................................................................................. 91
6.2.2 SUBJECT ...................................................................................................... 91
6.2.3. DIRECT OBJECT .......................................................................................... 91
6.2.4. OBJECT OF PREPOSITION ............................................................................ 91
6.2.5. ACTIVE VOICE ............................................................................................. 92
6.2.6. PASSIVE VOICE ........................................................................................... 92
6.2.7. APPOSITIVE PHRASE ................................................................................... 92
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 93
6.3. ADVERB CLAUSE ................................................................................................. 93
6.3.1. SUBORDINATORS IN ADVERB CLAUSES ....................................................... 94
6.3.2. ACTIVE VOICE ............................................................................................. 95
6.3.3. PASSIVE VOICE ........................................................................................... 95
EXERCISES............................................................................................................ 95
7. IRREGULAR VERBS LIST ........................................................................................ 96
8. G A B A R I T O S ................................................................................................ 100
PROVAS COMENTADAS DE INGLÊS........................................................................... 111
2015/2016 ................................................................................................................... 113
Gabarito Comentado ................................................................................................ 114
2014/2015 ................................................................................................................... 116
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 117
2013/2014 .................................................................................................................. 119
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 120
2012/2013 .................................................................................................................. 122
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 123
2011/2012 .................................................................................................................. 125
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 127
2010/2011 .................................................................................................................. 130
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 132
2009/2010 .................................................................................................................. 134
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 135
2008/2009 .................................................................................................................. 137
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 139
2007/2008 .................................................................................................................. 141
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 143
2006/2007 .................................................................................................................. 145
Gabarito Comentado ............................................................................................... 148
 2. NUMBERS
BASIC LEVEL 2.1 NUMERALS

1. ALPHABET Herein under we can see the first twenty (20) numbers:
Aqui abaixo podemos ver os primeiros vinte números:
Each single letter has a specific, unique and characteristic sound, although this sound 0 – zero 7 – seven 14 – fourteen
can differ when combined with other letters in order to form a word. Nevertheless, it is 1 – one 8 – eight 15 – fifteen
fundamental to know how to pronounce the English alphabet correctly. It will be
2 – two 9 – nine 16 – sixteen
needed when someone asks you to spell your name or any other word.
3 – three 10 – ten 17 – seventeen
4 – four 11 – eleven 18 – eighteen
Cada letra tem um som específico, característico e único, embora este som possa diferir quando
combinado com outras letras, de modo a formar uma palavra. No entanto, é fundamental saber 5 – five 12 – twelve 19 – nineteen
pronunciar o alfabeto inglês corretamente. Será necessário quando alguém perguntar como se 6 – six 13 – thirteen 20 – twenty
soletra o seu nome ou qualquer outra palavra.

After twenty, for each of the tens, we add the numbers from one to nine.
A = ei E=i I = ai M = em Q = kiu U = iu Y = uai
Depois do vinte, para cada uma das dezenas, acrescentamos os números de um a nove.
Examples: 21 – twenty-one; 22 – twenty-two; 25 – twenty-five; 29 – twenty-nine.

B = bi F = ef J = djei N = em R = ar V = vi Z = zi
After number ten, all the tens are always ended with TY.
*
Depois do número dez, todas as dezenas terminam com TY.
Examples: 20 – twenty; 30 – thirty; 40 – forty; 50 – fifty; 60 – sixty; 70 – seventy;
C = ci G = dgi K = kei O = ou S = ess W = dabliu 80 – eighty; 90 – ninety.

Hundreds, thousands and millions are written with the correspondent number in front
of the words HUNDRED, THOUSAND or MILLION.
D = di H = eitch L = el P = pi T = ti X = ecs
Centenas, milhares e milhões são escritas com o número correspondente na frente (antes) das
palavras HUNDRED, THOUSAND or MILLION.

* In British English (BrE), the Z sounds like zed.

* Em inglês britânico (BrE), o Z tem som de “zed”.

8 ALPHABET | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Examples: There is one shark here. There are twelve birds here.
Há um tubarão aqui. Há doze pássaros aqui.
100 – a/one hundred; 200 – two hundred; 300 – three hundred;
500 – five hundred; 700 – seven hundred; 900 – nine hundred;
1,000 – a/one thousand; 4,000 – four thousand; 6,000 – six thousand
8,000 – eight thousand; 9,000 – nine thousand; 10,000 – ten thousand
23,000 – twenty three thousand; 56,000 – fifty six thousand
365,017 – three hundred sixty five thousand and seventeen
1,000,000 – a/one million; 7,000,000 – seven million

FIQUE LIGADO!
2.2. ORDINALS
◘ Em Inglês, a vírgula (,) é usada para separar milhares e milhões.
Exemplos: Herein under, we can see the main ordinal numbers used on a day-to-day basis:
23,500 = twenty-three thousand (and) five hundred Aqui abaixo podemos ver os principais números ordinais usados diariamente:
400,301 = four hundred thousand three hundred (and) one 0 – zero 1st – first 2nd – second
905,720 = nine hundred five thousand seven hundred (and) twenty 3rd – third 4th – fourth 5th – fifth
1,630,014 = one million six hundred thirty thousand (and) fourteen th
6 – sixth th
7 – seventh 8th – eighth
22,000,600 = twenty-million (and) six hundred 9th – ninth 10th – tenth 11th – eleventh
3,000,000,297 = three billion two hundred (and) ninety seven 12th – twelfth 13th – thirteenth 14th – fourteenth
◘ O ponto (.) é usado para separar decimais. 15th – fifteenth 16th – sixteenth 17th – seventeenth
Exemplos: th
18 – eighteenth th
19 – nineteenth 20th – twentieth
0,5 (Português) = 0.5 (Inglês)
1.500,34 (Português) = 1,500.34 (Inglês) After number ten, all the tens with zero are always ended with TIETH.
3.456.809,77 (Português) = 3,456,809.77 (Inglês) Depois do número dez, todas as dezenas terminam com TIETH.
Examples: 20th – twentieth; 30th – thirtieth; 40th – fortieth; 50th – fiftieth; 60th –
sixtieth; etc.

After the twentieth (ordinal number), we put twenty (numeral) plus the numbers from
one to nine (in ordinal). For the consecutive tens, this rule is equally applicable.
Depois do vigésimo (número ordinal), colocamos vinte (numeral) mais os números ordinais do
primeiro ao nono. Para as dezenas subsequentes, esta regra é igualmente aplicável.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | NUMBERS 9

Examples: This is the FIRST person in line. This is the NINTH person in line.
Esta é a primeira pessoa da fila. Esta é a nona pessoa na fila.
st th rd th
21 – twenty-first; 35 – thirty-fifth; 43 – forty-third; 59 – fifty-ninth;
62nd – sixty-second; 77th – seventy-seventh; 86th – eighty-sixth;
89th – eighty-ninth; 94th – ninety-fourth; 98th – ninety-eighth

Hundreds, thousands and millions are written with the correspondent number in front
of the words HUNDRED, THOUSAND or MILLION.
Centenas, milhares e milhões são escritas com o número correspondente na frente (antes) das
palavras HUNDRED, THOUSAND or MILLION.

EXERCISES:
Examples:
Write the respective ordinals and numerals:
Escreva os respectivos ordinais e numerais:
100th – a/one hundredth; 301st – three hundred (and) first;
03 – _________ 03rd – ________ 15 – __________
1,000th – a/one thousandth; 2,702nd – two thousand seven hundred second; th
15 – ________ 27 – _________ 27th – _________
1,000,000th – a/one millionth; 6,000,047th – six million forty-seventh; th
49 – _________ 49 – ________ 32 – ___________
8,056,763rd – eight million fifty six thousand seven hundred sixty (and) third; nd
32 – ________ 11 – _________ 11th – __________
32,600,001 – thirty two million six hundred thousand (and) first
68 – _________ 68th – ________ 76 – ___________
th
76 –_________ 12 – ________ 12th – __________
99 – _________ 99th – ________ 14 – ___________
FIQUE LIGADO! th
14 – ________ 100 – ________ 100th – _________
◘ Em Inglês, as abreviações dos números ordinais seguem as regras apresentadas abaixo e têm a
1,345 – ____________________________________________________________________
seguinte grafia:
1,560,300 – ________________________________________________________________
FIRST=1st SECOND=2nd THIRD=3rd THE OTHERS=Xth
322nd – ____________________________________________________________________
◘ No caso específico das centenas, milhares e milhões (ordinais) observa-se a regra de composição dos
numerais, com o acréscimo de TH no final do último número: 2,761st – ___________________________________________________________________

ONE-HUNDREDTH=100th ONE-THOUSANDTH=1,000th 10,947th – __________________________________________________________________

ONE-MILLIONTH=1,000,000th ONE-BILLIONTH=1,000,000,000th _____________ – two hundred thirty five thousand five hundred sixty four
235,564th – _________________________________________________________________
97,783,290 – ________________________________________________________________
_____________ – seven million seven hundred seventy thousand seven hundred seventy seven

10 NUMBERS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Complete the numbers according to the example: (*) Exceptions: a) The article A is used, when needed, before words that begin with
Complete os números de acordo com o exemplo: the sounds U/EW/EU (iu = y), for instance: a useful thing; a ewe; a European.
O artigo A é usado, quando necessário, antes de palavras que começam com os sons
U/EW/EU (iu=y), por exemplo: uma coisa útil; uma ovelha (fêmea); um europeu ou uma europeia.
Example: one – 1; tenth – 10th
b) It is also used, when needed, before words that begin with the sound O (uâ), for
six – ______________ ______________ – 12 thirty – ______________ __________– 100
instance: a one-eyed man; a once-played game.
______________ – 50 ______________ – 13 thirty-nine - __________ ___________ – 11
Também é usado, quando necessário, antes de palavras que começam com os som O (uâ), por
______________– 78 ______________ – 42 __________________23 seven – ________ exemplo: um homem caolho (de um olho só); um jogo uma vez jogado.
sixty-one – _________ four hundred – ______ four hundred – _______ ___________ – 99
______________ – 19 _______ – 49 AN → used before words with VOWEL SOUND
_______________ - 48 eighty – ___________ eighty – ___ UM/UMA → usado antes de palavras com SOM DE VOGAL
_______________ – 92 a hundred forty-six __ sixty-seven –_______ seventeen – ____
______________ – 19 ______________ – 49 __________________48 eighteen – ______
Examples: an apple; an aircraft; an orange; an hour (*)
eighty – ___________ ______________ – 92 a hundred forty-six - ___ sixty-seven – ___
____________ – 100 sixth – ____________ twelveth – ___________ _________ – 39th
(*) Exceptions: The article AN is also used, when needed, before words that begin with
eleventh – ________ seventy-eighth – ____ ______________ – 92nd __________ – 46th H, but only when the letter H has no sound – it is mute. It is important to remember
that in English there are few words beginning with mute H and the most common are:
3. ARTICLE heir, hour, honor, honest.
O artigo UM/UMA também é usado, quando necessário, antes de palavras que começam
3.1. INDEFINITE ARTICLE: A OR AN com H, mas apenas quando o H não tem som – é mudo. É importante lembrar que em ingles há
poucas palavras começadas com H mudo e as mais comuns são: herdeiro, hora, honra, honesto.
The indefinite articles A/AN can be both used for masculine or feminine words.
However, they can only be used with singular words, NEVER with plural ones.
3.2. DEFINITE ARTICLE: THE

Os artigos indefinidos UM/UMA podem ambos ser utilizados para palavras masculinas ou femininas.
The definite article THE can be used for male or female words, as well as for singular
Contudo, eles só podem ser utilizados com palavras no singular, NUNCA no plural.
and plural ones.
Os artigos definidos O/A/OS/AS podem ser utilizados para palavras masculinas ou femininas, bem
Examples: It is a book. They are books.
como para as singulares ou plurais.
That is an apple. Those are apples.

Examples: The boy is here. The boys are here.

A → used before words with CONSONANT SOUND
The girl is there. The girls are there.
UM/UMA → utilizado antes de palavras com SOM DE CONSOANTE
Examples: a pen, a man, a girl, a university (*)

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ARTICLE 11

 USAGES – utilizações: The Endeavour
f) Before hotels and stores with impersonal names.
a) Before a specified word. Antes de hotéis e lojas com nomes impessoais.
Antes de uma palavra determinada. Examples: The Ritz (Hotel)
Examples: This is the book that I promised to lend you. The Starbucks (Café)
Those are the shirts which she gave me.
g) Before names of rivers and oceans.
b) Before words with unique meaning. Antes de nomes de rios e oceanos.
Antes de palavras com sentido único. Examples: The Atlantic (ocean)
Examples: The sun also rises. The San Francisco (river)
I love to look at the moon. The Pacific (ocean)

c) Before countries whose names include words like UNION, UNITED or h) Before names of deserts, poles, imaginary lines and tropics.
REPUBLIC or the ones presented in the plural form. Antes de nomes de desertos, pólos, linhas imaginárias e trópicos.
Antes de países cujos nomes incluem palavras como UNIÃO, UNIDOS (UNIDO) ou REPÚBLICA, ou Examples: The Tropic of Cancer
aqueles que são apresentados na forma plural.
The Sahara Desert
Examples: The United States
The South Pole
The Netherlands
The Ecuador
The Soviet Union
The Republic of Ireland
i) Before superlatives.
Antes de superlativos.
d) Before names of groups of mountains, islands, straits and canals.
Examples: The best student
Antes de nomes de cadeias montanhosas, ilhas, estreitos e canais.
The largest house in the city
Examples: The Bahamas
The hottest day of the year
The Himalaya
j) Before musical instruments and names of rhythms and dances.
The Bering Strait
Antes de instrumentos musicais e nomes de ritmos e danças.
The Panama Canal
Examples: The flamenco
The guitar
e) Before ship names.
The samba
Antes de nomes de embarcações (marítimas ou espaciais).
k) Before ordinal numbers.
Antes de números ordinais.
Examples: The Queen Mary
The USS Eisenhower

12 ARTICLE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Examples: The first 02. ____ lion is ____ biggest one in ____ circus.
The seventeenth
The seventieth (A) a; the; the
(B) that; a; ___
(C) this; the; the
l) Before family names, whenever they are presented in the plural form.
(D) a; a; the
Antes de nomes de família (sobrenomes), sempre que estes são apresentados no plural.
Examples: The Donald‟s are a famous family
03. Ted, ____ soldier, has become ____ rich man.
The Silva‟s aren‟t as famous as the Donald‟s

FIQUE LIGADO! (A) the; ____

Não usamos artigos definidos nas seguintes situações: (B) ____; the
(C) a; ____
(D) the; a
a) Antes de nomes próprios (Carol is my friend)
b) Antes de adjetivos possessivos (Your father is a good man)
c) Antes de substantivos usados em sentido geral (Books are expensive nowadays) 04. ____ man who sold me ____ books lives in ____ suburbs. He is ____ very nice man.
d) Antes de substantivos abstratos usados em sentido geral (Life is very hard)
e) Antes de nomes de refeições (I‟m going to have lunch/dinner/breakfast)
f) Antes de nomes de títulos seguidos de nome próprio (Professor Mason is the best) (A) a; those; a; a
g) Antes de nomes de idiomas e/ou línguas (They both speak English very well) (B) that; some; a; the
h) Antes de esportes, ciências e matérias acadêmicas (Biology is an important science) (C) the; these; the; a
i) Antes de estações do ano, meses e dias da semana (Winter is the coldest season) (D) this; that; some; the

EXERCISES: 05. On my last vacation, I visited ____ England, ____ U.S.A. and ____ Soviet Union.

Use the appropriate article(s) to complete the following sentences. Choose the best possible (A) ____; ____; the
answer. (B) ____; ____; ____
(C) ____; the; the
(D) ____; a; a
01. Entering ____ university should be ____ exciting experience for ____ men and women .

06. I took ____ exciting trip. ____ trip was to Japan.

(A) an; an; an
(B) a; an; ___
(A) a; the
(C) a; an; an
(B) the; a
(D) an; an; ___
(C) an; a
(D) an; the

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ARTICLE 13

07. ____ Brazil is ___ big country. 12. ____ Apollo 13 was ____ very famous space shuttle back in ____ 20 th century.

(A) the; a (A) the; ____; a

(B) an; ____ (B) the; a; a
(C) ____; an (C) ____; the; a
(D) ____; a (D) the; a; the

08. The boys brought ____ ewe, ____ European bird and ____ milk. 13. ____ baker works in ____ bakery and bakes ____ lot of bread every day.

(A) a; a; ____ (A) a; ____; ____

(B) a; an; ____ (B) the; the; a
(C) a; an; a (C) ____; a; a
(D) an; a; ____ (D) the; ____; ____

09. ____ girl at ____ back of ____ room is eating ____ sandwich. 14. Entering ____ bank, I saw ____ man trying to mug ____ old lady.

(A) the; the; the; a (A) a; a; a

(B) ____; a; the; the (B) the; a; an
(C) a; a; a; ____ (C) ____; ____; an
(D) the; ____; ____; a (D) the; ____; an

10. ____ death of ____ friend of mine made me sad. 15. When I was talking to ____ woman in black, she was in ____ University full of young people
with ____ hats on their heads.

(A) a; the
(B) ____; a (A) a; a; a
(C) the; a (B) the; a; ____
(D) the; the (C) ____; ____; an
(D) the; ____; a

11. My friend‟s death is ____ important lost for ____ Thompson‟s.

16. ____ Brown‟s met ____ White‟s last night. Then, they went together to ____ restaurant
downtown. After having ____ fantastic meal, they saw ____ play at ____ National Theater.
(A) a; ____
(B) the; the
(C) ____; the (A) the; the; the; a; a: a
(D) an; the (B) the; the; a; a; a; the
(C) ____; ____; a; a; a; a
(D) ____; ____; the; the; the, a

14 ARTICLE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

17. She loves to play ____ guitar and dance ____ flamenco. Her brother, however, prefers to play (C) ____; the; the
____ piano. (D) ____; a; ____

(A) the; ____; a 22. ____ Captain said: “it is ____ honor to finally meet ____ whole class of 1999”.
(B) the; the; the
(C) a; a; a
(A) ____; the; ____
(D) a; ____; the
(B) The; an; the
(C) The; a; the
18. Mike is always ____ first student in his class. Actually, he can consider himself ____ best (D) ____; a; the
student in ____ whole school.

4. PLURAL
(A) a; a: a
(B) a; a; the 4.1. MAIN RULE
(C) a; the; the
(D) the; the; the The main rule for the formation of the plural is to add one S to
the singular.
19. ____ General on ____ left side of ____ President of ____ Federative Republic of Brazil is ____ A regra principal para a formação do plural é acrescentar um S à
very well-known man. forma singular.
Book Books
(A) the; the; the; a; a
(B) the; the; the; the; a
(C) a; a; a; a; the
(D) the; the; a; the; the

Girl Girls
20. When we were living in ____ Bahamas, my father was living in ____ Florida. Five years later,
all ____ family was living together on ____ very nice farm in ____ state of Alabama.

(A) the; ____; the; a; a

(B) the; the; a; a; a
(C) a; ____; a; a; a
(D) the; ____; the; a; the
Table Tables

21. ____ Mount Everest is ____ highest peak in ____ Himalaya.

(A) ____; the; ____

(B) ____; the; a

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PLURAL 15

4.2. OTHER SPECIFIC USES Para palavras terminadas em F ou FE, acrescentamos S, mas há exceções. Exemplos mais comuns:

a) For words finishing in CH, X, S, SH, SS or Z, we add ES at the end. WIFE → WIVES LIFE → LIVES
Para palavras terminadas em CH, X, S, SH, SS, Z, acrescentamos ES no final. KNIFE → KNIVES WOLF → WOLVES
CALF → CALVES LEAF → LEAVES
WITCH WITCHES OAF → LOAVES HALF → HALVES
BOX BOXES SHEAF → SHEAVES SELF → SELVES
GAS GASES SHELF → SHELVES THIEF → THIEVES
BUS BUSES
KISS KISSES
4.3. COMPOUND NOUNS

b) For words finishing in O after consonants, we add ES at the end.

Generally, only the last word goes to plural when dealing with compound nouns.
Para palavras terminadas em O depois de consoantes, acrescentamos ES no final.
Examples:
Geralmente, apenas a última palavra vai para o plural quando lidamos com nomes compostos.
POTATO POTATOES Exemplos:
TOMATO TOMATOES
INNUENDO INNUENDOES CLASSROOM → CLASSROOMS HOUSEWIFE → HOUSEWIVES
BOOKSHELF → BOOKSHELVES STREETCAR → STREETCARS

FIQUE LIGADO!
When it comes to compound words disjointed by hyphen, the first part of the
Exceções:
compound word will go to plural. This happens because, usually, the first one is the
piano → pianos photo → photos negro → negros noun and the second one its qualifier.
soprano → sopranos euro → euro No que toca a palavras compostas por justa-posição (com hifen), a primeira parte da palavra
composta irá para o plural. Isto acontece, porque, normalmente, a primeira é o substantivo e a
segunda o seu qualificador.

c) For words finishing in Y after consonants, we eliminate it and add IES at the end.
MOTHER-IN-LAW → MOTHERS-IN-LAW
Para palavras terminadas em Y depois de consoantes, eliminamo-lo e acrescentamos IES no final.
LOOKER-ON → LOOKERS-ON

LADY → LADIES HOBBY → HOBBIES CITY → CITIES

DEFICIENCY → DEFICIENCIES DEMOCRACY → DEMOCRACIES 4.4. SOME IRREGULARS

Irregular plurals are totally different from their respective singular words. The only
d) For words finishing in F or FE we add S, but there are exceptions. Most common
way to know them is by memorizing. Most relevant examples:
examples:

16 PLURAL | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Os plurais irregulares são completamente diferentes dos seus respectivos singulares. A única forma PAY ATTENTION!
de saber cada um deles é memorizando-os. Exemplos mais relevantes: ◘ When an expression of quantity is followed by the preposition OF, the
verb ALWAYS agrees with the object. Examples:
CHILD → CHILDREN FOOT → FEET Part of the book was interesting. (book – was)
MAN → MEN MOUSE → MICE Some of the students were late for class. (students – were)
PERSON → PEOPLE WOMAN → WOMEN
GOOSE → GEESE LOUSE → LICE ◘ Expressions of quantity that can be followed by the preposition OF: ALL,
MOST, SOME, HALF, PART.
TOOTH → TEETH OX → OXEN

◘ There are words in English that are always singular, even though they
4.5. THE SAME AS IN LATIN OR GREEK might have plural meanings. They are:
• anybody • each (+ noun) • everybody • nobody
There are some specific words that have their plural formed according to Latin and • somebody
Greek rules. Examples: • anyone • every (+ noun) • everyone • no one
Há algumas palavras específicas que têm os seus plurais formados de acordo com as regras do • someone
Latim e do Grego. Exemplos: • anything • something • nothing • something
With these words the verb always comes in the singular form. Examples:
NUCLEUS → NUCLEI SYLLABUS → SYLLABI Everybody is watching TV.
FOCUS → FOCI FUNGUS → FUNGI There is nobody home.
CACTUS → CACTI or CACTUSES THESIS → THESES Is there anything in the fridge?
CRISIS → CRISES PHENOMENON → PHENOMENA
INDEX → INDICES or INDEXES APPENDIX → APPENDICES
CRITERION → CRITERIA HYPOTHESIS → HYPOTHESES 4.6. THE SAME AS SINGULAR

Some English words are invariable, which means they are the same when in singular or plural
forms. Examples:
Algumas palavras inglesas são invariáveis, o que quer dizer que as suas formas singulares e plurais
são as mesmas. Exemplos:

DEER → DEER
SHEEP → SHEEP
SERIES → SERIES
FISH → FISH
TROUT → TROUT

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PLURAL 17

BARRACKS → BARRACKS
SPECIES → SPECIES 3. These clever young (psychologist) ____________ are working as (assistant)
INNOCUOUS → INNOCUOUS ____________ in that hospital downtown.
FAMOUS → FAMOUS
MAXIMUM → MAXIMUM 4. Many (housewife) ____________ do the shopping once a week.

FIQUE LIGADO!
5. They read several interesting (story) ____________ last night.
◘ Certas palavras são SEMPRE utilizadas no plural, pelo que não têm singular (e o verbo que as
acompanha também é SEMPRE utilizado no plural). Exemplos: police; clothes; tools; todas as
roupas de duas partes (shorts, pants, slacks, trousers, etc.); objetos formados por duas partes 6. Those (fungus) ____________ are very common in the Amazon forest.
(glasses, scissors, clippers, etc.).
7. There are more (girl) _______ than (boy) _______ in most of the (city) ________ of
◘ Nomes de ciências são GERALMENTE apresentados no plural, embora o verbo que os acompanha these (country) ________.
seja apresentado no singular. Exemplos: Mathematics, Economics, Physics, Statistics,
Politics, etc.
8. My husband invited our (parent-in-law) _________ to have dinner.
Mathematics is the hardest subject this year.
I don‟t like to think that Politics is a science. 9. He broke three (tooth) _________ playing volley with these (child) ________.

◘ Em palavras terminadas em FUL, usualmente acrescenta-se S para obter o plural. Exemplos:

10. There are more (person) _________ in China than anywhere in the world.
handful → handfuls; armful → armfuls.

11. (Church) _________ are not as full as (discotheque) ____________.

◘ As palavras NEWS, MEASLES, MUMPS and THE UNITED STATES são usados com o verbo
no singular. Exemplos:
12. (Subway) ____________ and (bus) __________ are two (means) __________ of
What is the latest news? News happens in every language.
transportation that we can see in almost all big (town) ___________.
The mumps is very common in several countries. Is that the measles?

13. Natural (disaster) _________ are among the most unpredictable (phenomenon)
EXERCISES: __________ in the planet.
Fill in the blanks with the PLURAL of the words in parentheses.
14. Their (mother) _________ have always told them: take your (foot) ________ off the
table.
1. There are several pretty (secretary) ____________ at that South African company.

15. When we were (kid) ________, we used to go to music (show) ________ together. Back
Good (job) ____________ have never been that easy to find.
then, it was normal for (child) _________ to have (louse) _______.

2. The (saleswoman) ____________ at that department store wear uniforms.

18 PLURAL | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

16. I like to go to (forest) ___________ and hunt (deer) _______. My (brother-in-law) 5. PRONOUNS
____________ prefer to fish (trout) _________.

5.1 SUBJECT PRONOUNS

17. What are the (criterion) __________ to get in those awesome (faculty) ___________?

18. As soon as I knew that these (issue) _________ were being debated in the (conference)
____________, I bought our (ticket) __________.
19. How many (species) __________ of (fish) ________ are there in the (river) _________
that cross the Northern (state) __________ of Brazil?
20. We were supposed to type all these (index) ____________ but, unfortunately, we have
lost the paper where the (professor) ____________ have written the necessary
(information) ____________.
In English, all clauses must have at least one subject and one verb, except for the ones
that are presented in the imperative. Along with the subject of the clause, it is possible
to have a noun or a subject pronoun. So, in general terms, we can say that subject
pronouns work as the subject of the clause (1), do the action (2), replace the noun (3)
and are placed before the main verb (4).
Em inglês, todas as orações têm que ter, pelo menos, um sujeito e um verbo, exceto aquelas que
são apresentadas no imperativo. Juntamente com o sujeito da oração é possível ter um nome ou
um pronome sujeito. Por isso, em termos gerais, podemos dizer que os pronomes sujeito
funcionam como o sujeito da oração (1), praticam a ação (2), substituem o nome (3) e são
colocados antes do verbo principal (4).

The subject pronouns are: I, YOU, HE, SHE, IT, WE, YOU and THEY.
21. Do their (godfather) ____________ know how many (building) ____________ Mr. Brown
owns downtown? Examples:

22. As a matter of fact, the beautiful black (coat) _________ are not as expensive as the Mary and Paul = THEY
yellow (skirt) _____ that our (sister) _______ sold to the flight (attendant) ___________
that came to the store the day before yesterday. You and I = WE
You and your sister = YOU
23. How many (syllabus) _________ are there in the (word) __________ (hypothesis) The cat = IT
____________ and (appendix) ___________ ?
The cat and dog = THEY
Mary = SHE
24. Her little (daughter) ____________ have English (class) ____________ on (Monday)
Paul = HE
____________, (Wednesday) ____________ and (Friday) ____________.

25. I prefer to study French on (Thursday night) ____________.

26. I found many old (photo) ____________ when I was cleaning the (drawer)
____________ in my closet.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PRONOUNS 19

 FIQUE LIGADO!
A língua inglesa define duas categorias distintas de pronomes demonstrativos: singulares e plurais.
IT é usado para substituir BABY, CHILD e KID quando o sexo não for mencionado.
The singular demonstrative pronouns are: THIS and THAT.
Exemplo: The kid is playing. = It is playing.
The plural demonstrative pronouns are: THESE and THOSE.

SHE é usado para substituir nomes de navios e, por vezes, de carros.

Exemplos: The Bahia Tropical is a great ship. = She is a great ship.
The BMW is the fastest car I‟ve ever seen. = She‟s the fastest car I‟ve ever
seen.
HE, SHE são usados para animais de estimação, quando estes são designados pelo seu nome
próprio.
Exemplo: My little dog, Bob, is very special. = He is very special.
We use THIS and THESE in the place of people, animals and/or objects that are NEAR
the person who is talking.
Nós usamos ESTE, ESTA, ISTO e ESTES, ESTAS no lugar de pessoas, animais e/ou objetos que
estão PERTO da pessoa que está falando.
On the other hand, we use THAT and THOSE in the place of people, animals and/or
objects that are FAR from the person who is talking.
Por outro lado, utilizamos AQUELE, AQUELA, ESSE, ESSA, AQUILO, ISSO e AQUELAS, AQUELAS,
ESSES, ESSAS no lugar de pessoas, animais e/ou objetos que estão LONGE da pessoa que está
falando.

Other demonstrative pronouns (and/or adjectives) are SUCH, THE ONE and THE ONES.
5.2 OBJECT PRONOUNS
Outros pronomes demonstrativos (e/ou adjetivos) são TAL, TAIS, TÃO, TANTO, O QUAL, A QUAL,
OS QUAIS, AS QUAIS.
The object pronouns work as the object of the clause, as they are the ones that suffer
the action. They are placed after main verbs and prepositions.
Examples:
Os pronomes objeto funcionam como o objeto da oração, uma vez que são eles que sofrem a ação.
Eles são colocados depois de verbos principais e preposições. I have never seen such beautiful kids.
These books are the ones that I told you about.

The object pronouns are: ME, YOU, HIM, HER, IT, US, YOU and THEM.

5.4. QUANTIFIERS (QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES)

Examples:
I love him. The quantifiers can be divided in two major categories: the countable ones and the
Bob went to the movies with us. uncountable ones. There are some quantifiers that can be both countable and
uncountable.
I gave her my best CD.
Os quantificadores podem ser divididos em duas grandes categorias: os contáveis e os incontáveis.
Let‟s talk to them.
Existem alguns quantificadores que podem ser, simultaneamente, contáveis e incontáveis.
Countable quantifiers: MANY, FEW, A FEW and LOTS OF.
5.3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADJECTIVES) Uncountable quantifiers: MUCH, LITTLE, A LITTLE and A GREAT DEAL OF.
Both: A LOT OF and A LOT (this one is typically used at the end of the sentences).
The English language defines two different categories of demonstrative pronouns: singular and
plural.

20 PRONOUNS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Examples:
You have much money, because you have many dollars.
I have little money, because I have few dollars.
They have a few books, but they are enough for their studies.
He has a little money, but it is enough to buy the tickets.
I have a lot of friends. / I have a lot of money.
She eats a lot, because she spends a great deal of time at home.
My wife likes my family a lot. = My wife likes my family very much.
There are lots of students at that university.
The word money is uncountable. It is impossible to think about it like a countable
word, even in Portuguese. We can‟t say: “This car costs a thousand moneys”.
A palavra dinheiro é incontável. É impossível pensar nela como uma palavra contável, mesmo em
português. Nós não podemos dizer: “Este carro custa mil dinheiros”.
Dollar (US$), Real (R$), Euro (€) or any other currency or monetary unit are considered
countable, including in the Portuguese language. We are used to say, for example:
“This car costs ten thousand dollars”.
Dólar (US$), Real (R$), Euro (€) ou qualquer outra unidade monetária são consideradas contáveis,
até mesmo na língua portuguesa. Nós estamos acostumados a dizer, por exemplo: “Este carro
custa dez mil dólares”.
5.5. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
The possessive pronouns show who or what the noun possesses. Nevertheless,
possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns don‟t have the same usage.
Os pronomes possessivos mostram quem ou o quê o nome possui. No entanto, pronomes e
adjetivos possessivos não têm a mesma utilização.
Possessive Pronouns: MINE, YOURS, HIS, HERS, ITS, OURS, YOURS and THEIRS.
These pronouns will NEVER come before a noun (This car is mine). They are used to
avoid the repetition of a noun already present in the sentence (Your book is red and
mine is blue). It is also possible to use them after a noun + OF (He is a friend of mine).
Estes pronomes NUNCA virão antes de um nome (Este carro é meu). Eles são utilizados para evitar
a repetição de um nome já presente na frase (O seu livro é vermelho e o meu é azul). Também é
possível utilizá-los depois de um nome + DE (Ele é um amigo meu) (amigo meu = amigo + de +
mim).
Possessive Adjectives: MY, YOUR, HIS, HER, ITS, OUR, YOUR and THEIR.
These adjectives ALWAYS come before a noun (This is my car). They agree with the
owner, not with the ownership (Our dictionary is thicker than your encyclopedia).
Estes adjetivos SEMPRE aparecem antes de um nome (Este é meu carro). Eles concordam com o
possuidor (dono), não com a posse (propriedade) (Nosso dicionário é mais espesso que a sua
enciclopédia).
5.6. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
In English, the reflexive pronouns are commonly used to substitute the word ALONE
(He‟s home by himself), or to mention the subject twice (The man shot himself),
underlining and emphasizing something or someone previously presented (The car
itself was undamaged).
Em inglês, os pronomes reflexivos são usualmente utilizados para substituir a palavra
sozinho(a)(os)(as) (Ele está em casa sozinho) (sozinho = por ele mesmo = com ele próprio), ou
para mencionar o sujeito duas vezes (O homem atirou nele próprio), sublinhando ou enfatizando
algo ou alguém previamente apresentado (O carro, ele mesmo, estava intacto).
Reflexive Pronouns: MYSELF, YOURSELF, HIMSELF, HERSELF, ITSELF
OURSELVES, YOURSELVES and THEMSELVES
Examples:
The dog is eating by itself.
My parents-in-law are traveling by themselves.
I, myself, shall do the work.
We are talking to ourselves.
She burnt herself.
[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PRONOUNS 21
5.7. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADVERBS) How many TV sets do you have at home? I have three TV sets at home.
How many eggs are there in the fridge? I think there are at least seven.
Herein under, we have a summarized presentation of the main interrogative pronouns HOW LONG = HÁ QUANTO TEMPO?
and adverbs used in the English language. How long have you lived here? I have lived here for fifteen years.
Aqui abaixo, temos uma apresentação resumida dos principais pronomes e advérbios usados na How long have you been studying English? I‟ve been studying English since 2002.
língua inglesa.
HOW WELL = QUÃO BEM?
How well do you play basketball? Oh, not so good! Honestly, I suck on this.
QUESTIONS ANSWERS
How well does she drive? I think she drives pretty well!
WHY = POR QUÊ?
HOW GOOD = QUÃO BOM?
Why do you like to study English? Because it is a beautiful language!
How good are you at sports? I‟m awesome!
WHEN = QUANDO?
How good is he at playing snooker? He says he plays damn good!
When were you born? I was born in April, 1983.
HOW FAR = QUÃO LONGE?
WHERE = ONDE?
How far is your house from mine? I think is about 6 km.
Where do you live? I live in Brasília.
How far are we from school? We are almost there.
WHAT = QUAL? (usado para idéias em geral)
How far is their apartment? It is near that big mall down the street.
What do you want to do this weekend? I want to play volleyball.
HOW BIG = QUÃO GRANDE?
WHICH = QUAL? (usado para idéias específicas, quando a escolha é restrita)
How big is Amazonas? I read that it is the biggest state in Brazil.
Which kind of books do you prefer to read? I prefer to read novels.
How big is our farm? It has more than 5 square kilometers (km2).
WHO = QUEM? (função: sujeito)
HOW HIGH = QUÃO ALTO?
Who is that man? That man is my husband.
How high is Mount Everest? Mount Everest is 8,848 meters high.
WHOM = QUEM? (função: objeto)
How high are you? I‟m 1,83 cm (more than 6 feet) high.
With whom does Cathy play tennis? She usually plays tennis with her sister.
HOW DEEP = QUÃO PROFUNDO?
WHOSE = DE QUEM?
How deep is Grand Canyon? It attains a depth of over a mile (6,000 feet).
Whose purse is that? That is Susan‟s purse.
How deep is that pool? It is more than 5 meters deep.
WHAT _______ LIKE? = COMO? (características físicas e personalidade) (+descritivo)
HOW OFTEN = QUÃO FREQUENTE / COM QUE FREQUÊNCIA?
What is your brother like? He is younger, taller and funnier than I am.
How often do you travel on business? About twice a month.
What is the weather like? It is sunny, hot and very dry.
How often do you go to church? I go there every single weekend.
HOW = COMO? (meio de transporte e condição) (+sintético)
How do you go to school? I go to school by bus.
How are you? I‟m fine, thanks!
HOW MUCH = QUANTO? (para substantivos incontáveis)
How much does this dress cost? This dress costs a lot of money.
How much is this dress? I guess it is very expensive.
HOW MANY = QUANTO(S)? (para substantivos contáveis)

22 PRONOUNS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

EXERCISES: 3. All the boys like Helen very much.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Complete the following sentences with the possessive adjective that refers to the subject of the 4. I often see you and your sister in the school cafeteria.
sentence. _____________________________________________________________________________
5. He always goes to the movies with his parents.
1. She knows ________________ lesson well. I also know ________________ lesson well. _____________________________________________________________________________
2. Helen likes _______________________________________________ English class a lot.
6. I know both boys very well.
3. He does ______________________________________ homework on the bus every day.
4. You always get good grades on _________________________________________ tests. _____________________________________________________________________________
5. Both girls prepare __________________________________________ lessons very well. 7. Frank always waits for John and me after the lesson.
6. The black cat loves ____________ food. Mary and I do __________ homework together. _____________________________________________________________________________
7. Joel drives to work in ___________________________________________________ car.
8. He drives Helen and Grace to school every morning.
8. Grace writes a letter to _________________________________ aunt every single week.
9. 9. The dog wags __________________ tail when it sees ___________________ master. _____________________________________________________________________________
10. Mark and Judy like _______________________________________ English teacher a lot. 9. I sit next to Henry.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Choose the correct form. 10. My wife and I always have dinner with Mary and her husband on Friday nights.
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. I often see (they, them) on the bus.
2. She lives near (we, us). In the following sentences, substitute the words in italic for the correct possessive
3. (We, us) always walk to school together. pronoun.

4. He teaches (we, us) English.

5. She sits near (I, me) during the lesson. 1. These seats are our seats.
6. I know both of (they, them) well. 2. These seats are ours.
7. I always speak with (he, him) in English. 3. This umbrella is her umbrella.
8. What is the matter with (he, him) today? _____________________________________________________________________________
9. He explains the lesson to (we, us) each morning. 4. These pencils are your pencils.
10. There are some letters here for you and (I, me). _____________________________________________________________________________
5. That fountain pen is my fountain pen.
Substitute the word or words in italic for the correct object pronoun. _____________________________________________________________________________
1. I see Mr. Smith on the bus every morning. 6. That overcoat is his overcoat.
I see him on the bus every morning. _____________________________________________________________________________
2. I sit near Grace and Frank during the lesson. 7. Is this pack of cigarettes your pack of cigarettes or is it William‟s?
____________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PRONOUNS 23

8. This is my dog‟s leash.
_____________________________________________________________________________
9. Are these our pants or are they their pants?
_____________________________________________________________________________
10.Which house do you prefer: my house, her house or his house?
_____________________________________________________________________________
11. Will they go to their farm or to our farm next weekend?
_____________________________________________________________________________
Complete the following sentences with a possessive adjective or a possessive pronoun.
1. William lost _____________________ pen. Will you please lend him ______________________?
2. I arrived in time for _______________ class, but Helen was late for ______________________.
3. They have ____________________ traveling methods, and we have ______________________.
4. We naturally prefer _________________ methods, and they naturally prefer _______________.
5. I‟ve found _____________________ notebook, but John wasn‟t able to find _______________.
6. They think that _________ home is the prettiest one in the neighborhood, but we prefer _____.
7. He drives to work in _____________________ car, and she drives to work in _______________.
8. Tell him not to forget to bring __________ tennis racket, and don‟t forget to bring __________.
9. They swim in ____________________ pool, and we swim in ____________________________.
10. We prefer _______________________________ car to _______________________________.
Complete the sentences below with the correct reflexive pronoun:
1. The little girl hurt ________________________________________ when she fell off the stairs.
2. We protect __________________________________________ from the rain with an umbrella.
3. The girl taught ______________________________________________________ how to sew.
4. Both boys taught ___________________________________________________ how to swim.
5. We all enjoyed ___________________________________________ at the concert last night.
6. The children amuse _______________________________________________ with the kitten.
7. The policeman shot _________________________________________________ by accident.
24 PRONOUNS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
8. Did you enjoy ______________________________________________ at the party last night?
9. You will cut _____________________________________ with that knife if you are not careful.
10. I once cut ______________________________________________ badly with the same knife.
Substitute the word alone for the preposition by plus the respective reflexive pronoun.
1. He went for a walk in the park alone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
2. They made that long trip through the woods alone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
3. I don‟t like to go to the movies alone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
4. Helen, however, prefers to go to the movies alone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
5. John likes to take long walks in the woods alone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
6. The old couple lives alone in a cottage in the woods.
________________________________________________________________________________.
7. John works alone in a small office.
________________________________________________________________________________.
8. My aunt, although she is rather rich, prefers toliveone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
9. Do you like to eat alone?
________________________________________________________________________________.
10. I went to the opera alone last night.
________________________________________________________________________________.
 6. NOUNS COUNTABLE NOUNS

A noun is a word used to name a person, an animal, a place, a thing, a country, a Examples:
region and/or any abstract idea, among others.
Um substantivo ou nome é uma palavra utilizada para nomear uma pessoa, um animal, um local, He has four books.
uma coisa, um país, uma região e/ou qualquer ideia abstrata, entre outras.
They‟ve lived in two continents.
She‟s washing a few dishes.

6.1. GENRE That businessman owns a dozen buildings in this city.

He drank many glasses of red wine.
When it comes to genre, we can divide the nouns in two distinct groups or families:
PROPER NOUNS (specific names of people, animals, places or things) and COMMON UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
NOUNS (general names).
No que diz respeito ao gênero, podemos dividir os substantivos em dois grupos ou famílias
Examples:
distintos: NOMES PRÓPRIOS (nomes específicos de pessoas, animais, lugares or coisas) e NOMES
COMUNS (nomes genêricos ou generalistas).
I need to drink much water everyday.

Examples: There‟s only some air inside.

They need loads of energy to run the marathon.

Is he Mark? No, he‟s Philip. That hospital is in need of much blood.

I‟d love to spend my vacation in a desert island. Did you earn a little money?

That chair is green. = That is a green chair.

My wife is working a lot. COLLECTIVE NOUNS

Examples:
6.2. CATEGORY

The jury is deciding today.

Regarding their category, names can be classified according to the four following
groups: COUNTABLE NOUNS, UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS, COLLECTIVE NOUNS and My family roots for the best team.
ABSTRACT NOUNS. The farmer is concerned about his herd.
Relativamente à sua categoria, os nomes podem ser classificados e enquadrados em um dos Are you willing to join that committee?
quatro grupos seguintes: NOMES CONTÁVEIS, NOMES INCONTÁVEIS, NOMES COLETIVOS e That is an excellent class.
NOMES ABSTRATOS.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | NOUNS 25

ABSTRACT NOUNS They are ALWAYS used AFTER indefinite pronouns, such as: SOMEONE; SOMEBODY;
SOMETHING; SOMEWHERE; ANYBODY; ANYONE; NO ONE; NOBOBY; ANYTHING; NOTHING;
ANYWHERE; and NOWHERE.
Examples:
Eles são SEMPRE utilizados DEPOIS de pronomes indefinidos, tais como: ALGUÉM; ALGO; ALGUM
LUGAR; QUALQUER UM/NINGUÉM; NINGUÉM; QUALQUER COISA/NADA; QUALQUER LUGAR;
This wine gives me a sense of warmth. LUGAR NENHUM.
We are still waiting for justice to be done.
Self-confidence is essential to achieve success. Examples:
The whole world is seeking for peace.
I‟m worried about my parents‟ health. She is beautiful. In this room there‟s nobody healthy.
She smells nice. She hasn‟t become a cool person.

6.3. FORMS The baby looks sick. They seem such nice people.

Concerning its forms, a noun can appear as a subject, a possessive or an object.

7.1. COMPARATIVE DEGREE
No que toca às suas formas, um nome pode aparecer como sujeito, possessivo ou objeto.

Whenever the adjective has one or two syllabi (short adjective), we add ER to it.
As a subject: The English teacher is tall.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem uma ou duas sílabas (até 7 letras, inclusive) (adjetivo curto).
As an object: He chose the English teacher. acrescentamos ER ao dito adjetivo.
As a possessive: The English teacher‟s car is green.

Cold + ER = Colder This city is colder than Rio.

Bright + ER = Brighter This yellow is brighter than that one.
7. ADJECTIVES Cheap + ER = Cheaper This dress is cheaper than that one.
Old + ER = Older You are older than my brother.
Adjectives are words used to describe, qualify and/or modify nouns or pronouns. In
English, adjectives are ALWAYS used in the singular form – they NEVER vary. They
Whenever the adjective has more than two syllabi (long adjective), we put MORE or
usually come BEFORE the subject that they are modifying, but always AFTER some
LESS before the adjective, depending on the comparison that we intend to establish.
connecting verbs.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem mais de duas sílabas (oito ou mais letras) (adjetivo longo), colocamos
Adjetivos são palavras utilizadas para descrever, qualificar e/ou modificar nomes ou pronomes. Em
MAIS ou MENOS antes do adjetivo, dependendo da comparação que pretendemos estabelecer.
inglês, os adjetivos são SEMPRE usados na forma singular – ELES NUNCA VARIAM. Geralmente
aparecem ANTES do sujeito que estão modificando, mas sempre DEPOIS de alguns verbos
conectores. MORE/LESS + Difficult = More difficult / Less difficult
These connecting verbs are: TO BE, TO SEEM, TO APPEAR, TO SOUND, TO TASTE, TO That lesson was more difficult than this one.
FEEL, TO SMELL, TO BECOME, TO GET and TO LOOK.
These exercises are less difficult than those ones.
Estes verbos conectores são: SER/ESTAR, PARECER, APARECER, SOAR, SABER (ter
sabor/gosto de), SENTIR, CHEIRAR, TORNAR-SE, CONSEGUIR e OLHAR.

26 ADJECTIVES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

MORE/LESS + Beautiful = More beautiful / Less beautiful
My house‟s garden is more beautiful than yours.
His wife‟s dress is less beautiful than this one.
MORE/LESS + Expensive = More expensive / Less expensive
This Ferrari is more expensive than theirs.
Her apartment is less expensive than mine.
The adjectives GOOD, WELL, BAD and FAR have distinct comparative forms, which
means they are exceptions that we need to memorize:
Os adjetivos BOM, BEM, MAU/RUIM e LONGE/DISTANTE têm formas comparativas distintas, o que
quer dizer que são exceções que precisamos memorizer:
MOST/LEAST + Difficult = Most difficult / Least difficult
That lesson was the most difficult one.
These exercises are the least difficult ones.
MOST/LEAST + Beautiful = Most beautiful / Least beautiful
My house‟s garden is the most beautiful in the city.
His wife‟s dress is the least beautiful in the party.
MOST/LEAST + Expensive = Most expensive / Least expensive
This Ferrari is the most expensive in the country.
Her apartment is the least expensive in the building.

Good/well → Better Bad → Worse Far → Further

The adjectives GOOD, WELL, BAD and FAR have distinct superlative forms, which
This book is better than the last one I read. means they are exceptions that we need to memorize:
The French red wine is worse than this one. Os adjetivos BOM, BEM, MAU/RUIM e LONGE/DISTANTE têm formas comparativas distintas, o que
Your apartment is further than ours. quer dizer que são exceções que precisamos memorizer:

NOTE that all comparatives are followed by THAN. Good/well → Best Bad → Worst Far → Furthest
OBSERVE que todos os comparativos são seguidos por DO QUE. This book is the best I‟ve ever read.
This French red wine is the worst I‟ve ever had.

7.2. SUPERLATIVE DEGREE Your farm is the furthest I know.

Whenever the adjective has one or two syllabi (short adjective), we add EST to it. NOTE that all superlatives are preceded by THE.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem uma ou duas sílabas (até 7 letras, inclusive) (adjetivo curto). OBSERVE que todos os superlativos são precedidos por O/A (artigo definido).
acrescentamos EST ao dito adjetivo.
Cold + EST = Coldest This city is the coldest in Brazil.
Bright + EST = Brightest This yellow is the brightest one.
Cheap + EST = Cheapest This dress is the cheapest one.
Old + EST = Oldest You are the oldest boy in the classroom.
Whenever the adjective has more than two syllabi (long adjective), we put MOST or
LEAST before the adjective, depending on the comparison that we intend to establish.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem mais de duas sílabas (oito ou mais letras) (adjetivo longo), colocamos
MAIS ou MENOS antes do adjetivo, dependendo da comparação que pretendemos estabelecer.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ADJECTIVES 27

 16. This summer is _____________________ (hot) ___________________________ last summer.
17. Her sweater is ____________________________ (pretty) ________________________ yours.
Irregular Comparative and Superlative Forms
18. Our garden used to be _____________________ (large) _________________________ theirs.

Good or well better best

Complete the sentences using the superlative form of the adjectives between brackets.
Bad or ill worse worst

1. Grace is _______________________ (old) girl in class.

Much
Many more most
Some
Little Less least
Far further furthest
EXERCISES:
Complete the sentences using the comparative form of the adjectives between
brackets.
1. He is _____________________________________ (young) ________________________ I am.
2. Mr. Smith is much ______________________ (old) __________________________ I expected.
3. Chicago is _______________________________ (big) ____________________________ Paris.
4. This book is ___________________________ (good) ________________ the last one we read.
5. This winter the weather is ___________________ (bad) _________________ it was last winter.
6. This exercise is ________________________ (easy) ________________________ the last one.
7. This metal is _____________________________ (valuable) ________________________ gold.
8. Jane is _____________________________ (attractive) ________________________ her sister.
9. Today the weather is _____________________ (warm) __________________ it was yesterday.
10. John‟s car was much _________________________ (expensive) ___________________ mine.
11. This contract is _________________________ (satisfactory) ____________ the previous one.
12. This street is even ____________________ (wide) __________________________ Broadway.
13. These exercises are ________________(difficult) ____________________ some of the others.
14. The climate of Caracas is ___________________ (good) _______________ that of Maracaibo.
15. John is much _____________________ (clever) ___________________________ his brother.
2. This is ___________________ (expensive) book that I own.
3. George is ___________________ (bad) student in the class.
4. The Herald is ______________________ (important) newspaper in town.
5. Tokyo is ___________ (large) city in the world today.
6. He is _______________ (ambitious) boy I‟ve ever known.
7. Helen was ________________________ (attractive) girl at the party.
8. She wore ____________ (pretty) dress.
9. She is __________________ (intelligent) person I‟ve ever met.
10. The story you told was _________________ (funny) of all.
11. January is ___________ (cold) month of the year.
12. Which is __________ (good) route from Miami to New York?
13. The Pacific is _____________ (large) ocean in the world.
14. The Everest is _____________ (high) mountain in the world.
15. This chair is ____________________ (comfortable) chair in the whole house.
16. These exercises are ____________ (difficult) in the whole book.
17. You‟re _____________ (tall) boy around.
18. Back on those days, my mother was _______________ (good) cook
8. ORDER AND CATEGORY OF ADJECTIVES
According to their order and category, we can classify the English adjectives following
the pattern presented below.
De acordo com a sua ordem e categoria, podemos classificar os adjetivos ingleses seguindo o
padrão apresentado no quadro abaixo.

28 ORDER AND CATEGORY OF ADJECTIVES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 1. This T-shirt costs US$45.
_________________________________________________
2. There are three bedrooms in my apartment.
_________________________________________________
3. These pants are US$90.
_________________________________________________
4. It takes me about 20 minutes by bus.
_________________________________________________
5. My girlfriend is tall dark-haired with beautiful blue eyes.
_________________________________________________
6. My parents-in-law usually call me every other weekend.

9. VERB TO BE
EXERCISES:
Organize the sentences correctly according to the adjective categories and orders: 9.1. PRESENT

1. this – small – cheap – a – apartment – is – old Affirmative Negative Interrogative

This is a cheap small old apartment, I am / I’m I am not / I’m not Am I?
2. little – daughter – Italian – this – beautiful – my – young – girl – smart – is You are / You’re You are not / You aren’t Are you?

____________________________________________________________________________ He is / He’s He is not / He isn’t Is he?

She is / She’s She is not / She isn’t Is she?
It is / It’s It is not / It isn’t Is it?
We are / We’re We are not / We aren’t Are we?
3. tall – American – that – round-faced – boy – well-groomed – has – arrived – just
You are / You’re You are not / You aren’t Are you?
______________________________________________________________________________
They are / They’re They are not / They aren’t Are they?
4. big – not – their – pyramidal – far – wooden – cottage – so – is – brownish – away
____________________________________________________________________________
5. marvelous – German – has – Porsche – sold – your – enormous – been – classic – silver 9.2. PAST
____________________________________________________________________________
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
Make questions for the following answers: I was I was not / I wasn‟t Was I?
You were You were not / You weren‟t Were you?
_________________________________________________ He was He was not / He wasn‟t Was he?

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | VERB TO BE 29

She was She was not / She wasn‟t Was she? Eu moro no Brasil. → I live in Brazil.
It was It was not / It wasn‟t Was It? Eu não moro no Brasil. → I don‟t live in Brazil.
We were We were not / We weren‟t Were we? Eu moro no Brasil? → Do I live in Brazil?
You were You were not / You weren‟t Were you? Eu não moro no Brasil? → Don‟t I live in Brazil?
They were They were not / They weren‟t Were they?
10. PRESENT TENSE

9.3. FUTURE
Within the Present there are four different tenses. They are presented herein after.
Dentro do Presente há quatro tempos verbais distintos. Eles são apresentados em seguida.
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
I will be I will not be / I won‟t be Will I be?
You will be You will not be / You won‟t be Will you be? 10.1. SIMPLE PRESENT CONTINUOUS

He will be He will not be / He won‟t be Will he be?

It is used to actions that are happening at this precise moment or, in other words, right
She will be She will not be / She won‟t be Will she be?
when the speech is being produced. The Simple Present Continuous tense always uses
It will be It will not be / It won‟t be Will it be? the verb TO BE as auxiliary. In the following chart you will find the proper way to make
We will be We will not be / We won‟t be Will we be? sentences:
You will be You will not be / You won‟t be Will you be? O Presente Simples Contínuo é usado para ações que estão acontecendo neste preciso momento
They will be They will not be / They won‟t be Will they be? ou, em otras palavras, exatamente quando o discurso está sendo produzido. Sempre utiliza o verbo
SER/ESTAR como auxiliar. No quadro seguinte você encontrará a maneira correta de construir
frases:
Note that the verb TO BE doesn‟t need an auxiliary verb to form negative and/or
interrogative clauses. Pay attention to the following examples: SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES

Repare que o verbo SER/ESTAR não precisa de verbo auxiliar para formar orações negativas e/ou pronoun or noun + to be + She is working now.
interrogativas. Preste atenção aos seguintes exemplos: main verb + ING +
AFFIRMATIVE They are studying upstairs.
complement
You are talking smoothly.
Eu sou brasileiro. → I am Brazilian.
pronoun or noun + to be + She isn’t working now.
Eu não sou brasileiro. → I am not Brazilian.
NEGATIVE not + main verb + ING + They aren’t studying upstairs.
Eu sou brasileiro? → Am I Brazilian? complement
You aren’t talking smoothly.
Eu não sou brasileiro? → Am I not Brazilian?

The same doesn‟t happen to any other regular or irregular verb. In order to check this
difference, take a look at the sentences herein under:
O mesmo não acontece com qualquer outro verbo regular ou irregular. De modo a confirmar esta
diferença, olhe para as frases abaixo:

30 PRESENT TENSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 noun or pronoun + don’t / We don’t work on the
Is she working now?
NEGATIVE doesn’t + main verb + weekend.
to be + pronoun or noun + Yes, she is. complement She doesn’t work on the
main verb + ING + No, she isn’t. weekend.
complement
INTERROGATIVE Are they studying right now?
Do you work on the
Yes, they are.
INTERROGATIVE Do/Does + noun or pronoun + weekend?
No, they aren’t.
main verb + complement Does she work on weekend?

Main Adverbs: now; this moment; at this moment; at this exact moment; right now; right away,
Main Adverbs: always; usually; generally; never; often; sometimes; regularly; rarely;
etc…
seldom; once; twice; three times; four times, etc…

10. 2 SIMPLE PRESENT

10.3. PRESENT PERFECT

It is used to actions that happen frequently or, in other words, in a repeated general
It is used to describe an action that: (1) happened at an unknown time in the past; (2) happened
manner. The Simple Present tense requires the verb TO DO as auxiliary. Remember
many times in the recent past; (3) started in the past and continues happening until now; (4) has
that the auxiliary forms are not used in affirmative sentences. The said affirmative
just finished a few moments before the speech was produced. The Present Perfect tense uses the
sentences have their main verb in its base form (infinitive form without TO) and, when
verb TO HAVE as auxiliary. Proper way to make sentences:
in the third singular person (HE, SHE or IT), we use the base form plus an S. Proper
way to construct sentences: O Presente Perfeito é usado para descrever uma ação que: (1) aconteceu em um período não
determinado do passado, ou seja, em um tempo anterior indefinido; (2) aconteceu diversas vezes
no passado recente; (3) começou no passado e continua acontecendo no momento do discurso;
O Presente Simples é usado para ações que acontecem frequentemente ou, em outras palavras, de (4) acabou de terminar pouco tempo antes do discurso ser produzido. Utiliza o verbo TER como
um modo repetitivo. Sempre requer o verbo FAZER como auxiliar para a formação de orações auxiliar. Forma correta de construir frases:
negativas e interrogativas. Lembre que o verbo auxiliar não é usado em orações afirmativas. Estas
têm o verbo principal na sua forma base (infinitivo sem o TO) e, quando está conjugado na terceira
pessoa do singular (ELE, ELA ou COISA/OBJETO), usamos a forma base acrescida de S. Forma SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES
correta de construir frases:
pronoun or noun + have / I have studied English since
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES has + past participle of the 2005.
AFFIRMATIVE
main verb + complement She has already gone out.
I/YOU/WE/THEY
noun or pronoun + main verb We work on the weekend. It has eaten recently.
AFFIRMATIVE + complement
pronoun or noun + haven‟t / I haven‟t studied English since
NEGATIVE hasn‟t + past participle of 2005.
HE/SHE/IT She works on the weekend. the main verb + complement She hasn‟t gone out yet.
noun or pronoun + main verb He watches TV every night.
+ s/es/ies + complement It hasn‟t eaten recently.
She studies every day.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PRESENT TENSE 31

 have / has + pronoun or
noun + past participle of the
INTERROGATIVE
main verb + complement
AFFIRMATIVE
haven‟t / hasn‟t + pronoun
or noun + past participle of
INTERROGATIVE
the main verb + complement
NEGATIVE
Have you studied English since have / has + noun or Have they been studying
2005? INTERROGATIVE pronoun + been + main English since 2005?
verb + ING + complement Has she been going out?
Has she gone out? AFFIRMATIVE
Has it eaten recently? haven’t / hasn’t + noun or Haven’t they been studying
INTERROGATIVE pronoun + been + main English since 2005?
Haven‟t you studied English
verb + ING + complement Hasn’t she been going out?
since 2005? NEGATIVE
Hasn‟t she gone out yet?
Hasn‟t it eaten recently?
Main Adverbs: for; since; over the last few days; during the last couple of months; over
the last few years, over and over again; etc…

Main Adverbs: lately, recently, for a long time; in the last few days; in the last few
weeks, in the last few months; just; already; yet; etc… EXERCISES

Choose the answer that correctly completes the sentences below.

10.4. PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS

1. She ___________________ and Paul _________________ at the present moment.

It is used to describe an action that started in the past and is continuously happening
until now. The Present Perfect Continuous tense is very similar to the Present Perfect
tense, although they can be perfectly distinguished from each other, given the fact that (A) is work; study
the first‟s action happens continuatively. The Present Perfect Continuous tense uses (B) working; studying
the verb TO HAVE as auxiliary. Proper way to make sentences: (C) are working; is studying
(D) is working; is studying
O Presente Perfeito Contínuo é usado para descrever uma ação que começou no passado e está
acontecendo continuamente até ao momento do discurso. É muito similar ao Presente Perfeito, 2. They _______________ this for 10 years, but unfortunately they ________________ yet.
embora possam ser perfeitamente diferenciados um do outro, dado o fato que a ação do primeiro
acontece continuamente. Utiliza o verbo TER como auxiliar. Forma correta de construir frases:
(A) hasn‟t been trying; has get
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES (B) have been trying; haven‟t gotten it
(C) have try; have been getting
noun or pronoun + have / They have been studying (D) haven‟t tried; are getting it
AFFIRMATIVE has + been + main verb + English since 2005.
ING + complement She has been going out.
3. That cute little boy that ______________ is my son. A boy that always ___________ has very
noun or pronoun + haven’t They haven’t been studying good health.
NEGATIVE / hasn’t + been + main English since 2005.
verb + ING + complement She hasn’t been going out.
(A) is playing; plays
(B) have been playing; play
(C) lays; playing

32 PRESENT TENSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (D) have played, played (B) has he
(C) hasn‟t he
(D) is he
4. His dream is to travel abroad but he _________________ enough money to do it. He will only
travel, if someone _________________ him money.
9. Since I was born, my mom and I _______________________ in the same city.

(A) don‟t have; lend

(B) didn‟t have; borrowed (A) have been living
(C) doesn‟t have; lends (B) have live
(D) doesn‟t have; borrows (C) haven‟t been live
(D) none of the above

5. Nowadays, she ________________ about how to _____________ this to ____________. 10. I don‟t know where John and ____________ brother ____________ now.

(A) is thinking; say; you (A) him; are

(B) knows; say; his (B) his; is
(C) knows; say; you (C) his; are
(D) none of the above (D) him; is

6. He ____________ to ______________ farm every first Monday in the month. 11. Where has Chris gone recently?

(A) travels; his (A) He went to Europe.

(B) is traveling; him (B) He has go to Europe.
(C) travels; him (C) He has gone to Europe.
(D) has traveling; his (D) He has went to Europe.

7. For a long time, I ____________________ such a great success. 12. It doesn‟t matter, I _____________ this over and over again.

(A) have (A) has done

(B) haven‟t had (B) has been doing
(C) has been having (C) have been doing
(D) haven‟t having (D) have did

8. He has bought that incredible black car, _______________?

(A) doesn‟t he

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PRESENT TENSE 33

13. Usually, men ____________ for a beautiful woman. 18. During the last month, they ______________ 8 hours a day.

(A) looks (A) have studied

(B) look (B) have been studying
(C) looking (C) are studying
(D) looked (D) study

14. What ____________ now? 19. My father, my mother and I ______________ to church lately.

(A) does she do (A) hasn‟t gone

(B) is she doing (B) haven‟t gone
(C) do she do (C) isn‟t going
(D) are she doing (D) aren‟t going

15. What ____________ lately? 20. Right now, the children ____________ video game and we ___________ the game on TV.

(A) does she do (A) are playing; are watching

(B) do she done (B) is playing; is watching
(C) has she done (C) play; watch
(D) has she do (D) plays; watches

16. What _____________ since 2 p.m.? 21. My father, my mother and I ______________ to church lately.

(A) is she do (A) hasn‟t gone

(B) has she been doing (B) haven‟t gone
(C) is she been doing (C) isn‟t going
(D) has she do (D) aren‟t going

17. He ____________ there every July. 22. Why _________________ to the door every time I arrive home?

(A) go (A) do it run

(B) goes (B) have it run
(C) going (C) has it run
(D) gone (D) does it run

34 PRESENT TENSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

23. Who _________________ with them? O Passado Simples descreve uma ação completa/acabada que aconteceu no passado e é
conhecido/determinado o tempo em que ocorreu. Diz respeito a ações que tiveram lugar em um
tempo passado determinado. Forma correta de construir frases:
(A) has travel
(B) has traveled
(C) are traveling
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES
(D) travel
noun or pronoun + main verb They worked last weekend.
AFFIRMATIVE + ED or irregulars’ list + She went to Rio yesterday.
24. Where _________________ this afternoon?
complement

noun or pronoun + didn’t + They didn’t work last

(A) are you going
NEGATIVE main verb + weekend.
(B) you go
(C) goes complement She didn’t go to Rio
yesterday.
(D) go

25. ___________________ with us? did + noun or pronoun + Did they work last weekend?
INTERROGATIVE main verb + Did she go to Rio yesterday?
AFFIRMATIVE complement
(A) Is she come
(B) Does she came didn’t + noun or pronoun + Didn’t they work last
(C) Is she coming INTERROGATIVE main verb + weekend?
(D) Has she came NEGATIVE complement Didn’t she go to Rio
yesterday?

26. His parents _______________________ yet.

(A) arrived Main Adverbs: yesterday; ago; when; last year; last month; last week; the day before
(B) haven‟t arrived yesterday; last Saturday; last winter, etc…
(C) hasn‟t arrived
(D) are arriving
Fique ligado!
11. PAST TENSE Na língua Inglesa, os verbos são divididos em duas grandes categorias: regulares e irregulares. Nos
verbos regulares forma-se o passado acrescentando ED ao respetivo infinitivo. Quanto aos
11.1. SIMPLE PAST irregulares, infelizmente só decorando!
Alguns verbos regulares: to work/worked/worked; to like/liked/liked (atenção, acrescentou-se
It describes a completed/finished action that happened in the past and it is known somente o D); to study/studied/studied (atenção, transformou-se o Y em I); to
when it occurred. The Simple Past tense refers to actions that took place in a previous stop/stopped/stopped (atenção, dobrou-se a última consoante).
specified time. Proper way to construct sentences: Alguns verbos irregulares: to go/went/gone – to see/saw/seen – to read/read/read – to
take/took/taken – to do/did/done – to fall/fell/fallen – to feel/felt/felt.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PAST TENSE 35

 My sister studied the day before yesterday (simple)
Interrogativa e Negativa: para a formação de orações interrogativas e negativas no passado é
necessário o uso do verbo auxiliar TO DO no passado (DID). Proper way to construct sentences:
Forma correta de construir frases:
I worked here last month. (affirmative)
Did I work here last month? (interrogative)
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES
I didn‟t work here last month. (negative)
Didn‟t I work here last month? (interrogative and negative) noun or pronoun + They were working last
AFFIRMATIVE was/were + main verb + ING weekend.
+ complement She was going to Rio
He went to the movies yesterday. yesterday.
Did he go to the movies yesterday?
noun or pronoun + They weren’t working last
He didn‟t go to the movies yesterday.
NEGATIVE was/were + not + main verb weekend.
Didn‟t he go to the movies yesterday? (interrogative and negative) + ING + complement She wasn’t going to Rio
yesterday.
Note que, com o uso do verbo auxiliar, o verbo principal volta para a forma base.
was/were + noun or Were they working last
INTERROGATIVE pronoun + main verb + ING weekend?
+ complement Was she going to Rio last
AFFIRMATIVE
11.2. PAST CONTINUOUS weekend?

The Past Continuous tense is the progressive form of the Simple Past tense. This means was/were + not + noun or Weren’t they working last
INTERROGATIVE pronoun + main verb + ING weekend?
that it is used to describe continuous actions that took place in a previous specified
+ complement Wasn’t she going to Rio last
time. Let‟s see its different usages and compare them with the Simple Past. NEGATIVE
weekend?
O Passado Contínuo é a forma progressiva do Passado Simples. Isto significa que é utilizado para
descrever ações contínuas que tiveram lugar em um tempo passado determinado. Vamos ver as
suas diferentes utilizações e compará-las com o Passado Simples.
It is also used to describe a long previous action that was interrupted by another short
previous action. Notice that the short action is generally presented in the Simple Past
It was raining there yesterday (continuous) VS It rained there yesterday (simple)
tense.
Também é utilizado para descrever uma longa ação passada que foi interrompida por outra curta
She was playing the piano last night (continuous) ação passada. Repare que a ação curta é geralmente apresentada no Passado Simples.
VS
She played the piano last night (simple) Have a look at the examples below:
Dê uma olhada nos exemplos abaixo:
My sister was studying the day before yesterday (continuous)
VS

36 PAST TENSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

It was still raining when she arrived home. O Passado Perfeito descreve uma ação ou evento que teve lugar em um passado remoto.
She was playing the piano when the game started. Geralmente, caracteriza uma ação terminada no passado que aconteceu antes de outra ação
completa que também teve lugar no passado. Aquela que é apresentada no Passado Perfeito
I was having lunch when the telephone rang.
aconteceu antes daquela apresentada no Passado Simples. Forma correta de construir frases:

SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES

LONG ACTION SHORT ACTION noun or They had worked a lot before
pronoun + had + past she arrived.
AFFIRMATIVE
participle / noun or
pronoun + main verb + ED She had gone to Rio before
Moreover, it can be used to describe two long and simultaneous actions that took place she went to São Paulo.
or irregulars’ list
in the past.
Para além disso, pode ser utilizado para descrever duas ações longas e simultâneas que tiveram noun or pronoun + hadn’t + They hadn’t worked a lot
lugar no passado. NEGATIVE past participle / noun or before she arrived.
pronoun + main verb + ED She hadn’t gone to Rio
or irregulars’ list before she went to São Paulo.
Take a look at the examples below:
Dê uma olhada nos exemplos abaixo: had + noun or pronoun + Had they
past participle / noun or worked a lot before she
INTERROGATIVE
pronoun + main verb + ED arrived?
AFFIRMATIVE Had she gone
It was still raining when she was cooking dinner. or irregulars’ list
to Rio before she went to São
She was playing the piano while he was reading a novel. Paulo?
hadn’t + noun or pronoun + Hadn’t they
My daughter was playing tennis while my son was watching TV. worked a lot before she
INTERROGATIVE past participle / noun or
pronoun + main verb + ED arrived?
NEGATIVE Hadn’t she
or irregulars’ list
gone to Rio before she went
LONG ACTION LONG ACTION to São Paulo?

The main adverbs used in this specific situation are: when; while; meanwhile; in the
meantime.
Os principais advérbios usados nesta situação específica são: quando; enquanto; enquanto isso. Main Adverbs: before; when; previously; etc…
He had gone to the movies when his mother passed
away.
11.3. PAST PERFECT
The book had fallen to the ground before I could avoid it.

It describes a completed action or event that took place in a remote past. Usually, the
Past Perfect characterizes a complete previous action that happened before another PAST PERFECT SIMPLE PAST
completed action that also took place in the past. The one that is presented in the Past
Perfect happened before the one that is presented in the Simple Past. Proper way to
construct sentences:

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PAST TENSE 37

11.4. PAST PERFECT CONTINUOUS 1. What had you done before you got married?

It describes a completed continuous action – generally, a long one – that took place in (A) I had work a lot.
the past and happened before another completed action or event that took place in the (B) I had worked a lot.
past. Proper way to construct sentences: (C) I have work a lot.
Descreve uma ação terminada contínua – geralmente longa – que teve lugar no passado e que (D) I have worked a lot.
aconteceu antes de outra ação ou evento completes que também foram levados a efeito no
passado. Forma correta de construir frases:
2. Where had you gone before you graduated?
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES

noun or pronoun + had + They had been working

been + main verb + ING /
AFFIRMATIVE
noun or pronoun + main
verb + ED or irregulars’
list
(A) I had go nowhere.
before she arrived. (B) I had gone nowhere.
(C) I haven‟t gone anywhere.
She had been going to Rio
before she went to São Paulo.
(D) I have go anywhere.

noun or pronoun + hadn’t +
NEGATIVE been + main verb + ING /
noun or pronoun + main
verb + ED or irregulars’ list
ad + noun or pronoun +
been + main verb + ING /
INTERROGATIVE
noun or pronoun + main
AFFIRMATIVE
verb + ED or irregulars’ list
They hadn’t been working 3. When did she come of age?
before she arrived.
She hadn’t been going to Rio (A) She come of age yesterday.
before she went to São Paulo. (B) She has come of age yesterday.
Had they been
(C) She had come of age yesterday.
working before she arrived? (D) She came of age yesterday.
Had she been
going to Rio before she went
to São Paulo? 4. How long were they away?

hadn’t + noun or pronoun + Hadn’t they

been + main verb + ING / been working before she (A) Very many time.
INTERROGATIVE
noun or pronoun + main arrived?
(B) Very much time.
NEGATIVE Hadn’t she been going to Rio
verb + ED or irregulars’ list (C) A long time.
before went to São Paulo?
(D) Any time.

Main Adverbs: before; when; previously; etc… 5. Had he been here before?

(A) Yes, he had.

EXERCISES (B) Yes, he has.
(C) Yes, he was.
For each one of the sentences herein under, select the only correct option. (D) Yes, he were.

38 PAST TENSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

6. How long have you been living in Brasília? Complete the sentences below with the correct tense of the verb between brackets.

(A) For many time. 1. She has already bought (already, to buy) a brand new car.
(B) For a long years.
(C) For a long time.
2. Before they got (to get) married, they had been (to be) engaged for 10 years.
(D) For much years.

3. I haven‟t finished (not, to finish) my work yet.

7. Where _______ they ___________?

4. They had been riding (to ride) their bikes before they met (to meet) their friends.
(A) has; studied
(B) have; been studying
(C) did; studied 5. Our great-grandparents have been living (to live) here since 1937.
(D) have; study

6. He was running (to run) with his wife when she fell (to fall) and hurt herself.
8. All the girls _____________ the party when my brother and I ____________ there. 7. We had just finished (just, to finish) cooking before you came.

(A) has left; arrived

8. What were you doing (to do) when you broke (to break) your leg?
(B) have leave; arrive
(C) had left; arrived
(D) has left; arrive 9. Before she resigned (to resign) from that South American company, she had worked (to work)
there for a long time.

9. Have you traveled abroad this year?

10. My son was studying / studied (to study) at UnB last night.

(A) No, I hasn‟t.

(B) No, I hadn‟t.
(C) No, I haven‟t.
(D) No, I didn‟t
Choose the only option that correctly completes the sentences below.

10. What car ______ he ______ recently?

1. Before ___________, your wife ____________ at least three different movies.

(A) has; buy

(A) get up; had already watched
(B) had; buy
(B) got up; has already watched
(C) had; bought
(C) getting up; had already watched
(D) has; bought
(D) gets up; has already watched

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PAST TENSE 39

2. We ___________ hard when Mike and her sisters ___________ us ___________ with them. 7. She ________________ anybody in the last couple of months.

(A) had been studying; called; to go (A) hasn‟t called

(B) studied; called; going (B) isn‟t calling
(C) have been studying; called; to go (C) hadn‟t called
(D) study; called; going (D) wasn‟t calling

3. When the phone __________________, she _____________ a letter to her boyfriend. 8. She _____________ of ______________ there next weekend.

(A) rung; had written (A) thought; go

(B) rings; is writing (B) thinks; go
(C) rang; was writing (C) had thinking; going
(D) rang; wrote (D) is thinking; going

4. He ___________________ TV while his mother _________________ dinner. 12. FUTURE

(A) watched; makes There is more than one way of constructing future clauses. In the English language, as
(B) is watching; made it happens to the Portuguese one, we can say “I will work tomorrow” OR “I am going
(C) have watched; had made to work tomorrow”. Both sentences mean that the action will take place in the future,
(D) was watching; was making although the second one uses the Present Continuous to express that thought. Let‟s
see what is the fundamental difference between them.
Há mais de uma maneira de construir orações futuras. Na língua Inglesa, assim como acontece na
5. My stepfather __________________ to Europe.
língua Portuguesa, nós podemos dizer “eu irei trabalhar amanhã” OU “eu vou trabalhar amanhã”.
Ambas as frases significam que a ação ocorrerá no futuro, embora a segunda utilize o Presente
(A) had already traveled Contínuo para expressar esse pensamento. Vamos ver qual é a diferença fundamental entre elas.
(B) was just traveled
(C) has just traveled
(D) is already traveled I will work tomorrow (less than 100% of certainty regarding the future action)
Eu trabalharei amanhã (menos de 100% de certeza em relação à concretização da ação futura)
6. His brother ______________ video game; meanwhile, my sister ___________ the laundry. VS
I am going to work tomorrow (100% of certainty regarding the future action)
(A) has played; had done Eu vou trabalhar amanhã (100% de certeza em relação à concretização da ação futura)
(B) is playing; has already done
(C) was playing; was doing
Thus, we should always use the following combinations:
(D) had played; was doing
Por isso, nós sempre deveríamos usar as seguintes combinações:
a) I think that… I will…

40 FUTURE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Eu acho que… eu (+ futuro com WILL)… complement
b) I am sure that… I am going to…
Will + noun or pronoun + main
Eu tenho certeza que… eu (+ futuro com TO BE GOING TO)… verb + complement Will they study tomorrow?
INTERROGATIVE OR
There is also the possibility of creating future clauses using a much more formal AFFIRMATIVE 2) To be + noun or pronoun + going Are they going to study
expression: SHALL. Following the grammar rule, the said expression may only be used to + main verb + complement tomorrow?
with two subject pronouns: I and WE.
Há também a possibilidade de criar orações futuras usando uma expressão muito mais formal: Will not (won‟t) + noun or
pronoun + main verb + Won‟t they study tomorrow?
SHALL. Seguindo a regra gramatical, a dita expressão só pode ser utilizada apenas com dois
complement
pronomes sujeito: EU e NÓS. INTERROGATIVE
OR
I will work tomorrow = I shall work tomorrow (more formal) NEGATIVE Aren‟t they going to study
To be not + noun or pronoun + tomorrow?
going to + main verb +
complement
12.1. SIMPLE FUTURE
Main Adverbs: tomorrow; the day after tomorrow; next week; next month; next
It describes an action that will happen in the future. This action will take place at a Sunday; next weekend; next summer; next year; etc...
given time in the future and won‟t repeat itself continuously. Proper way to construct
sentences:
Descreve uma ação que acontecerá no futuro. Esta ação terá lugar em um dado tempo futuro e 12.2. FUTURE CONTINUOUS
não se repetirá continuamente. Forma correta de construir frases:
It describes a continuous action that will be happening in the future. This action will
repeat itself continuously during a given period of time. Proper way to construct
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES sentences:
Descreve uma ação contínua que estará acontecendo no futuro. Esta ação repetir-se-á
Noun or pronoun + will + main
verb + complement continuamente durante um dado período de tempo. Forma correta de construir frases:
They will study tomorrow.
AFFIRMATIVE OR
Noun or pronoun + to be + They are going to study SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES
going to + main verb + tomorrow.
complement noun or pronoun + will + be
+ main verb + ING + They will be studying
Noun or pronoun + will not complement tomorrow.
(won‟t) + main verb + They won‟t study tomorrow. OR
AFFIRMATIVE
complement noun or pronoun + to be
NEGATIVE OR going to + be + main verb
They are going to be studying
Noun or pronoun + to be not + They aren‟t going to study + ING + complement
tomorrow.
going to + main verb + tomorrow.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | FUTURE 41

 noun or pronoun+ won‟t +
be + main verb + ING +
complement
OR
NEGATIVE
noun or pronoun + to be
not going to + be + main
verb + ING + complement
will + noun or pronoun + be
+ main verb + ING +
complement
INTERROGATIVE
OR
AFFIRMATIVE
to be + noun or pronoun +
going to be + main verb +
ING + complement
will not (won‟t) + noun or
pronoun + be + main verb
+ ING + complement
INTERROGATIVE
OR
NEGATIVE
to be not + noun or
pronoun + going to be +
main verb + ING +
complement
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES
They won‟t be studying
tomorrow. noun or pronoun + will +
AFFIRMATIVE have + past participle of the I will have finished my course
verb + complement by this time next year.
They aren‟t going to be
studying tomorrow.
noun or pronoun + won‟t +
NEGATIVE have + past participle of the I won‟t have finished my
verb + complement course by this time next year.
Will they be studying
tomorrow? will + noun or pronoun +
INTERROGATIVE have + past participle of the Will you have finished your
verb + complement
AFFIRMATIVE course by this time next year?
Are they going to be studying
tomorrow? won‟t + noun or pronoun +
INTERROGATIVE have + past participle of the Won‟t you have finished your
verb + complement course by this time next year?
NEGATIVE
Won‟t they be studying
tomorrow?
Main Adverbs: by this time next year; next Monday; at this hour next Wednesday; etc…
Aren‟t they going to be Some examples:
studying tomorrow? They will already have had dinner tomorrow night.
My brother will have watched a movie with his girlfriend tomorrow at 7 p.m.
Their bar will have closed next Friday evening.

Main Adverbs: the same as the ones used for the SIMPLE FUTURE. She will have gone back home tomorrow at this same hour.
They won‟t have won the game by this time tomorrow.
Will you have studied all your grammar by the end of next month?
12.3. FUTURE PERFECT

The Future Perfect tense describes an action that will have happened at a determined
time in the future. This action won‟t repeat itself continuously during that given period
of time. Proper way to construct sentences:
Descreve uma ação que terá acontecido em um tempo determinado no futuro. Esta ação não se
repetirá continuamente durante esse dado período de tempo. Forma correta de construir frases:
12.4. FUTURE PERFECT CONTINUOUS
The Future Perfect Continuous tense describes a continuous action that will have been
happening at a determined time in the future. This action won‟t repeat itself
continuously during that given period of time. Proper way to construct sentences:
Descreve uma ação contínua que terá acontecido em um tempo determinado no futuro. Esta ação
repetir-se-á continuamente durante esse dado período de tempo. Forma correta de construir
frases:

42 FUTURE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 2. I ________________ Peter next week.
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES

noun or pronoun + will + I will have been studying English (A) have met
AFFIRMATIVE have + been + main verb + for two years by this time next (B) meet
ING + complement year. (C) be going to meet
(D) will meet
noun or pronoun + won‟t + I won‟t have been studying
NEGATIVE have + been + main verb + English for two years by this time
ING + complement next year. 3. Yesterday, as he _________ down the street, he ___________ an old friend of his.

will + noun or pronoun + Will you have been studying

have + been + main verb + English for two years by this time (A) had walked; met
INTERROGATIVE
ING + complement next year? (B) walked; had met
AFIRMATIVE (C) was walking; met
won‟t + noun or pronoun + • Won‟t you have been studying (D) walked; was meeting
INTERROGATIVE have + been + main verb + English for two years by this time
ING + complement next year?
NEGATIVE 4. Fred __________________ me yesterday. He wanted to know if his brother ________________.

(A) called; arrived

Main Adverbs: the same as the ones used for the FUTURE PERFECT.
(B) was calling; arriving
Some examples: (C) called; had arrived
They will already have been having dinner tomorrow night. (D) has called; had been arriving
My brother will have been watching a movie with his girlfriend tomorrow at 7 p.m.
Their bar will have been working next Friday evening. 5. We _______________________________________ married by this time two months from now.
She will have been going back home tomorrow at this same hour.
They won‟t have been playing the game by this time tomorrow. (A) won‟t get
Will you have been studying all your grammar by the end of next month? (B) will get
(C) won‟t have got
(D) will have gotten
EXERCISES

6. I _________________________ what he ____________________ but I couldn‟t understand it.

Choose the correct option to complete the sentences herein under.
1. The little boy _____________ the picture of a cow at school next Thursday.
(A) hear; says
(B) heard; says
(A) draw (C) hear; say
(B) draws (D) heard; said
(C) is going to draw
(D) will drew

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | FUTURE 43

7. He ___________________________ the piano when the telephone ______________________. 12. When did she ______________________? I think she _______________________ yesterday.

(A) was playing; was ringing (A) left; left

(B) had played; is ringing (B) lived; live
(C) played; rang (C) live; leave
(D) was playing; rang (D) leave; left

8. Jessica _____________________________ in 1983. 13. She _________________________ give her parents the good news the day after tomorrow.

(A) has retire (A) shall

(B) retired (B) will have been
(C) was retire (C) is going to
(D) is retired (D) won‟t have

9. They _____________________________ next holiday. 14. Why ________________________ you so late? Because I _______________________ the bus.

(A) won‟t have travel (A) is; missed

(B) won‟t be traveling (B) are; have missed
(C) may not have travel (C) is; miss
(D) shall not travel (D) are; miss

10. Mr. Tribianni ____________________ into the room when the lawyer ______________ dinner. 15. Pablo ______________________ half the homework, when they ______________________ in.

(A) have gone; has (A) was finished; come

(B) has gone; had (B) had finished, come
(C) went; is having (C) has finished; came
(D) went; was having (D) had finished; came

11. Why _______________ those people singing? Because they ______________ gotten some 16. After _________________________ all the accounts, Bianca ___________________ the store.
unexpected good news.

(A) checks; locks

(A) was; had (B) checking; lock
(B) is; have (C) checking; has locked
(C) were; had (D) having checked; lock
(D) was; has

44 FUTURE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

17. They ___________________________________________ their diploma by this time next year. (C) is calling
(D) has been calling

(A) have gotten

(B) were getting 22. He _________________________ out _____________________________ soccer once again.
(C) will get
(D) will have gotten
(A) is going; playing
(B) went; to play
18. His next question _______________________________ me completely by surprise. (C) was going; playing
(D) has gone; to play

(A) takes
(B) taken 23. _________________________________ a look at that motorcycle.
(C) has taken
(D) has took
(A) take
(B) takes
19. They ______________ to her apartment last night but they ______________ there too late. (C) taking
She _________________ already ___________________. (D) took

(A) went; arrived; has; go 24. I ______________________ tomorrow, but my daughter _____________________ next
(B) go; arrived; has; gone weekend.
(C) have gone; arrived; have; go
(D) went; arrived; had; left
(A) am going; are going
(B) will leave; is going to travel
20. We ________________ surely __________ fleas if we ____________ as dirty as we ________. (C) leave; leave
(D) will go; will have been gone

(A) are; going to catch; remaining; were

(B) were; catch; remained; are 25. He __________________________ to drink water after ___________________________.
(C) were; caught; remain; were
(D) are; going to catch; remain; are
(A) likes; to run
(B) hates; ran
(C) loves; running
(D) enjoys; run

21. My mom __________________________________ me since the day before yesterday.

26. Why ___________ you __________ to work the whole summer?

(A) had called

(B) was calling (A) does; have

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | FUTURE 45

 (B) do; had
(C) did; had
(D) did; have

27. I _________________ by this time next year.

(A) will have graduated

(B) will graduated
(C) will been graduating
(D) will had graduated

28. He ____________________ to work yesterday because his car _____________________

down.

(A) didn‟t go; broke

(B) hasn‟t gone; broke
(C) haven‟t gone; break
(D) wasn‟t going; break

29. My little sister _________________ worse, so I‟ll have _______________ care of her. Anyway,
I just _______________ she _______________ better as soon as possible.

(A) got; take; hope; gets

(B) has gotten; to take; hope; gets
(C) is getting; taking; hoped; got

46 FUTURE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

INTERMEDIATE LEVEL
1. ADVERBS
An adverb is a modifying part of the speech. Adverbs are words that modify a verb, an
adjective, another adverb or the whole phrase or clause. It describes or gives
additional information about when, where, why or under what conditions and
circumstances something happens. It connects two clauses. Adverbs can be arranged
according to the following six classes: FREQUENCY, MANNER, TIME, PLACE, DEGREE OR
INTENSITY and DOUBT.
HELPING YOU
Adverbs can modify adjectives, but an adjective cannot modify an adverb. Thus, we say that “the
student drives really slow” or “the student drives slowly”. BUT NOT “He drives real fast”.
Some adverbs can take COMPARATIVE and SUPERLATIVE forms, however, the majority of adverbs
don‟t take these endings. Instead, they form the comparative using more or less and the superlative
using most or least, even the ones that have less than 2 syllables.
a) With sneakers on, she could move more quickly among the patients.
b) The flowers were the most beautifully arranged creations I've ever seen.
c) She worked less confidently after her accident.
d) That was the least skillfully done performance I've seen in years.

THE ROYAL ORDER OF ADVERBS

Verb Manner Place Frequency Time Purpose

Beth in the before

enthusiastically every morning to keep in shape.
swims pool dawn

Dad into every before to get a

impatiently
walks town afternoon supper newspaper.

Tess in her before

every morning
naps room lunch.

In actual practice, of course, it would be highly unusual to have a string of adverbial

modifiers beyond two or three (at the most). Because the placement of adverbs is so
flexible, one or two of the modifiers would probably move to the beginning of the
sentence: "Every afternoon before supper, dad impatiently walks into town to get a
newspaper." When that happens, the introductory adverbial modifiers are usually set off
with a comma.

1.1. FREQUENCY

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ADVERBS 47

These adverbs tell us how often an action takes place. They usually come before the
PAY ATTENTION!
main verbs and after auxiliary verbs in the majority of the sentences. They are, among
others: Some words finished with LY are not adverbs but adjectives.
Examples: friendly, lovely, ugly, silly, lonely, lovely, deadly, elderly.
Always = every time, all the time, forever Often = many times He is friendly. (adjective)
Never = not at any time or not on any occasion Seldom=almost ever The sing was lovely. (adjective)

Sometimes = on some occasions but not always or often Once = only one time He plays in a friendly way. (adjective)

Twice = just two times Many times = often

Rarely = almost never
1.2. MANNER
These adverbs describe how, or in what way, something happens. They derive from
adjectives and they are usually finished with the letters LY. Herein under are some
examples.
Slowly = at a slow speed, pace or rhythm
Quickly = at a fast speed, pace or rhythm
Carefully = with great attention or caution
Patiently = with patience
Fluently = in a fluent, rhythmic and correct way
Kindly = in a kind or pleasant way
Well = in a good way
Fast = in a quick way
Hardly = with a strong or tough attitude; with the improbability of happening
Usually = often There are other words finished with LY that can be both adjectives and adverbs.
Examples: daily, weekly, monthly, yearly and early.
We get up early (adverb) to be on time for an early (adjective) class.
They work daily (adverb) on a daily (adjective) newspaper.
It‟s deadly (adverb) to drive at deadly (adjective) speeds.
1.3. TIME
These adverbs refer to the time when something happens. Below there are some
examples.
Now = at the present time, in this exact moment
Still = that continues happening
Soon = within a short period of time, in a short while
Yesterday = on the day before today
Early = before the scheduled time or arranged hour
Tomorrow = on the day after today
Tonight = at the night of the present day
Next week = the week after this one
Last month = in the month before this one
Next year = the year after this one
On Sunday, on Monday, on Tuesday, on Wednesday, on Thursday, on Friday
In January, in February, in March, in April, in July, in August, in September

48 ADVERBS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

1.4. PLACE 1.6. DOUBT

These adverbs designate the place where something happens. We can find some examples in the These adverbs are applied to situations or events where a doubt, or a lack of absolute
following lines. certainty, is present. Herein under we can find some examples.
Here There Everywhere Maybe = Perhaps Probably Possibly
Above Around Beside
Upstairs Downstairs Between Perhaps, they won‟t be able to arrive on time.
Among Beneath Below Maybe, they will arrive on time.
We are coming after six, probably.
We are going upstairs in a few minutes. Possibly, she is trying to call you.
She is between my two brothers.
Our books are among yours. Other examples on how to use some adverbs:
I saw your children around there.

Don‟t you cry tonight, there‟s heaven above you, baby!

Now, I can‟t define what I really want to say!
1.5. DEGREE OR INTENSITY
Girl, I‟m leaving tomorrow.

These adverbs specify the degree to which an adjective, or another adverb, applies. I will always love you!
There are some examples below. Say it once, say it twice!
Very Too Almost It‟s too late, baby. Now it‟s too late!
More Less Again I am definitely going to be there tomorrow.
My father is getting more and more impatient.
They said that you were very stubborn. Sometimes, she really crosses the boundaries.
She almost went to your birthday party. Where is he trying to go so early in the morning?
Your mother-in-law is too stubborn. They must do it. Otherwise, they will be absurdly punished.
We should do less things everyday. How often does he go out before midnight?
Here we go again. What genre of music do you listen to when you get up?
Luckily, he had to leave the house very soon.
Your shoes often stay under the bed.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ADVERBS 49

 adrift far nay
PAY ATTENTION!
angrily frequently never
There are some words that can be both an adjective and an adverb, such as: fast, late, low.
anticlockwise G nevertheless
Examples:
A fast (adjective) car goes fast (adverb). apart gratis newly

I‟m late (adverb) for my late (adjective) class. as gratefully now

Any low (adjective) music gets me low (adverb). B H not
badly haltingly
before hard S
Main rules for the usage of adverbs:
believe hence seal
better here sharp
ADVERB + main verb
beyond homewards sometimes
She always goes to the movies.
blind I soon
C immediately stealthily
To be + ADVERB
carefully instead successfully
She is always at the movies.
close J T
closely just then
Auxiliary verb + ADVERB + main verb
completely K there
She will always be at the movies.
confidently knowingly thereby
currently L therefore
List of the most common adverbs used in the English language.
D late thick
A adversely all
definitely lately thither
aesthetically almost
ditto least thus
aboard afar alone
during leisurely timely
abominably afield along
E likely tomorrow
about afloat alongside
early long twofold
above afoot aloof
either M U
absurdly afoul aloud
even maybe unbowed
accidentally after already
ever merely underneath
accidently afterward also
exactly more unduly
accordingly afterwards altogether
excitingly N unfortunately
accurately again always
extra namely unhurriedly
acoustically ahead amok
F unwittingly
admiringly alike amuck

50 ADVERBS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

V b. My brother loves fast cars.
very ( ) adverb ( ) adjective
W
well c. Learning French is harder than I thought.
west ( ) adverb ( ) adjective
what
when d. That site is updated daily.
whence ( ) adverb ( ) adjective
where
whither e. My You‟ve just ruined my best dress.
Y ( ) adverb ( ) adjective
yes
f. My He is friendly.
( ) adverb ( ) adjective
EXERCISES
1. Classify the adverbs below according to what you‟ve just learned.
g. I'm watching the late class.

Mainly – ________ Usually – ________ Where – ________ ( ) adverb ( ) adjective

Deadly – ________ Behind – ________ Maybe – ________

Almost – ________ Tonight – ________ Rarely – ________ h. They are running too fast.
( ) adverb ( ) adjective

2. Find the adverbs that correspond to each adjective:

i. I hope you try harder in the future.

Fluent – ________ Friend – ________ Frequent – ________ ( ) adverb ( ) adjective

Slow – ________ Careful – ________ Rough – ________

Bad – ________ Supposed – ________ Accurate – ________ j. Voanews.com is a daily online newspaper.
( ) adverb ( ) adjective

3. Put an X in the correct option:

k. Computers work better nowadays.

a. The plane arrived late, as usual. ( ) adverb ( ) adjective

( ) adverb ( ) adjective
l. He was talking with her in a friendly way.
( ) adverb ( ) adjective

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ADVERBS 51

 PAY ATTENTION!
4. Complete the sentences below with the adverbs that relate to the words or expressions in
brackets, and classify each one of them: When a preposition follows a verb in an affirmative sentence, it will also follow the verb in an
interrogative sentence. So, the preposition will come, many times, at the end of the question.
Examples:
a) Sue is ________ (complete) crazy about her husband.
What are you talking about?
(Manner)
Who are you working for?

b)________ (usual), Tom goes out with his girlfriend. Every preposition has an object. An object of a preposition is a noun or a pronoun that comes after a
(Frequency) preposition to form a prepositional phrase.
Examples:

c)My daughter went to school ________ (the day before today). The trip that we are planning to Fernando de Noronha may be in December.

(Time) To = preposition; Fernando de Noronha = object of preposition

An object of a preposition can cause confusion when it comes to the comprehension of the
d)I think she is ________ (on the upper floor).
sentence’s structure because it can be taken as the subject of the said sentence.
(Place) Examples:
To Jane the wedding request was a big surprise.
e)________ (probable) we will need to go to the hospital. To = preposition; Jane = object of preposition;
(Doubt) The weeding request = subject of the sentence.

f) They have ________ (nearly, closely) the same age.

(Degree or intensity) 2.1. GENERAL PREPOSITIONS

2. PREPOSITIONS 2.1.1. The preposition IN is applied to the following situations.

Prepositions are small words that create a relation among the several different words PLACE, STATE, CITY or COUNTRY
or expressions that are part of one sentence. They are used to link nouns,
pronouns and idiomatic expressions within a sentence, in a cohesive and coherent Examples:
way. A preposition usually indicates the temporal, spatial or logical relation between
I live in that neighborhood.
the elements that constitute a sentence.
She lives in Florida.
Your son is in New York.
He used to live in the States.

52 PREPOSITIONS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

INSIDE OF SOMETHING or SOME PLACE Examples:

Examples: She always works in the morning.

I usually go to Rio de Janeiro in February.

The girl is in the kitchen. He was born in 1979.

The coffee is in the cup. They visit us in the spring.

The milk is in the fridge.

The pills are in the bathroom cabinet. BEFORE LANGUAGES

Examples:
DURATION OF AN ACTION (TIME)

They are speaking in English.

Examples:
We love to speak in French with each other.
He is talking in Spanish to his uncle.
He will do his work in three days.
They will be writing the report in the next few days.
She will get there in a couple of hours.
We‟ll finish it in a week. 2.1.2. The preposition ON is applied to the following situations.

WITH THE SENSE OF ABOVE OR ON TOP

Examples:

The book is on the table.

The pens are on the fridge.

BEFORE DAYS OF THE WEEK

Examples:

I‟ll have to go there on Monday.

Her birthday is on Thursday.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PREPOSITIONS 53

 Pay Attention!
Look at those trees over there!
If there are others elements, such as months or periods of day, related to days of the week, we
should always use the preposition ON. Don‟t throw stones at the birds!

Examples: She goes to her parents‟ house on Easter‟s Tuesday.

He likes to go out on Friday evening. PLACE OR DESIGNATION OF PLACE
st
They went to New York on April 21 .
Examples:

PLACE OR RESIDENCE IN A STREET, IF THE NUMBER ISN‟T MENTIONED

My father is at home.
We are at school.
Examples:

I live on Santa Monica Boulevard.

MOMENT OR REFERENCE TO A MOMENT
She told me (that) he lives on Fifth Avenue.

Examples:
2.1.3. The preposition AT is applied to the following situations.
We‟ll have to be there at noon.
PLACE OR RESIDENCE IN A STREET, WHENEVER THE NUMBER IS MENTIONED I can‟t tell you that at this moment.
Examples:

I live at 570, Santa Monica Boulevard. 2.1.4. The preposition FOR is applied to the following situations.

She told me (that) he lives at 137, Fifth Avenue.

DURATION OF AN ACTION (TIME)

EXACT HOUR
Examples:

Examples:
She played the piano for three hours.
I‟ve been studying English for the last three years.
We arrived at 10:00 a.m.
They went to their apartment at 8:30 p.m.
WHEN MENTIONING AN EXCHANGE OR A PERMUTE

DIRECTION OR SENSE OF DIRECTION

Examples:

Examples:
I rent my apartment for little money.

54 PREPOSITIONS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

She had lunch for a few bucks. 2.2 PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
WHENEVER FOR = TO
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE

Examples: Above The ceiling is above our heads.

Below There is a candy shop below their
apartment.
Shall I open the window for you?
There is a light over the table.
They did the homework for me.
Over = on, period of time, more than He proved to be a friend over the years.
It cost over US$1,000.

2.1.5. The preposition BY is applied to the following situations. The dog is under the table.
Under These children are all under seven.
MEANS OF TRANSPORTATION (exception: ON FOOT) John works under Bob Thompson‟s.
Inside = in The pen is inside the desk.
Examples: Outside The boss is outside the office.
Near = next to = close to She lives near me.
I came here by car. She goes to school by subway. Across = in front of The bank is across the street.
They are against your ideas.
WHENEVER THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ARE SINONYMS OF ALONE Against He is always against our ideals.
The chair is against the wall.

Examples: Behind The garage is behind the house.

Down We saw her walking down the street.

He lives by himself in São Paulo. = He lives alone in São Paulo. Up He was walking up that avenue.

They study by themselves. = They study alone. In back of The taxi is parked in back of the building.

We have done it by ourselves. = We have done it alone. In front of The ball rolled in front of the bus.
Through The bird flew through the open window.
Among (more than two things or Paul is among us.
AS SYNONYM OF UNTIL WHEN INDICATING TIME
people) It‟s among those books.
It is between the bank and the post office.
Examples:
Between (two things or people) He‟s between her two sisters.
She was between them both.
They will finish their job by 7:00 o‟clock.
I think I‟ll be there by Friday.
We will be having fun by this time next week.
You‟ll have succeeded by 2011.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | PREPOSITIONS 55

2.3. PREPOSITIONS OF DIRECTION 2.6. PREPOSITIONS OF WAY

PREPOSITION EXAMPLE PREPOSITION EXAMPLE

Into = to move inside I saw him going into the movies.

Out of = to move outside
Toward(s) = in the direction of
Opposite
He took some money out of his pocket.
With He will go to the club with his father.
This road leads toward the beach.
She was looking towards the horizon.
Like He is like his father.
The post office is opposite to his house.

To Can you move to your left, please?

2.7. OTHER PREPOSITIONS

2.4. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
despite = although / though They are playing football despite the rain.
During During the summer, I think I‟ll go to Rio.
in order to = with the intention to We will have to hurry in order to arrive on time.
After Would you please call after nine?

Before Take this medicine before lunch. throughout = during the whole time; It rained throughout the week at the beach.
all around; everywhere The news was spread throughout the country.
Until We must wait until ten p.m.

Around I get to my office around ten every

within = in a determined amount of time He‟ll finish the report within the required time.
morning.
About I think she will be away about a week.
Besides = in addition to Besides studying mathematics I study physics.

But Nobody saw the accident but him.

2.5. PREPOSITIONS OF POSSESSION to = indication of place or destiny I walked over to the window.

around He was driving around the block.

PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
Of The legs of this table are broken.
To This pencil belongs to Mary.
„S = of someone or something It‟s the teacher‟s car = It‟s the car of the
teacher

56 PREPOSITIONS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 3. CONJUNCTIONS
ALTERNATIVE = CHOICE
Conjunctions are words that join other words, phrases and/or clauses establishing
coordinate and subordinate clauses‟ relation.
CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

3.1. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS Or You must call her or she won‟t forgive you.

Neither.... nor Neither the orchestra nor the choruses were able to play harmoniously.
They can join single words or groups of words, but the structures must always have
He is neither a prince nor a frog.
elements with the same value. For instance: subject + subject; verb phrase + verb
phrase, sentence + sentence. When a coordinating conjunction is used to join Either ...or Either she leaves or I do! I haven‟t been to either the U.S.A. or Greece.
elements, the element becomes a compound element. The most common coordinating
conjunctions are presented below. Otherwise She should study more; otherwise she won‟t pass the test.

Else This isn‟t Sarah‟s book, it belongs to someone else.

ADDED = ADD
Or else You should better hurry, or else you will be late for work.

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

ADVERSATIVE = CONTRAST
And Melissa and Rachel are going to the movie.

Both.... and Both my sister and my mother play the piano. CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

But She is poor, but happy.

Not only ... but also Not only Sue has money, but she is also very beautiful.
Not only she studies, but she also plays the guitar. However That man, however, refused to go.

Still We still work at the same place.

Yet I‟m tired, yet I‟m glad I came. This is a simple yet effective solution.

Nevertheless I won‟t write to him; nevertheless, I believe you should do it.

Though Though she was deaf, she played piano beautifully.

But then I pass the test, but then it was really easy.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | CONJUNCTIONS 57

 CAUSE

CONCLUSIVE = CONCLUSION CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

Because He will succeed because he has worked hard.

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES
As As I was tired, I decided not to go.
So There was no one there, so I went away.
Since You will have vacations since you have passed the test.
Therefore You won‟t help me; therefore I must do it alone.

EXPLANATIVE = EXPLANATION COMPARATIVE

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

As…as She is as beautiful as her sister.

As He is without money as his wage hasn‟t come.
As if He prepared himself for this class as if he was preparing for a test.
Such as A person such as you must be happy.
As though She slept as though nothing had happened.
For I want to buy a new dress for my pretty girlfriend.
As well as He sings as well as I do.
Because I‟m going to Rio de Janeiro on Christmas because my family is there.
As As she was going to sleep, she felt the need to drink some water.

More… than This house is more expensive than that apartment.

3.2. SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS

These conjunctions connect subordinated clauses to a main clause, expressing a

relation between the ideas in the clauses. Subordinating conjunctions are a larger class
of words. Therefore, only a few of the more common ones are included herein under.

58 CONJUNCTIONS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

CONCESSIVE
FINAL

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

Although Although he seemed sad, he had to go. CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

Though He seemed sad, though he had to go. In order to Men work in order to live.

Despite Despite our hard job we couldn‟t finish the work. In order (that) Politicians make promises in order (that) they could win more votes.

In spite of In spite of the bad weather, we decided to go to the beach house. So that Men work so that they can eat.

Even if You will finish my homework even if it takes all night.

Even though He has to go on this trip, even though he is sick. INTEGRAL

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES

CONDITIONAL
Where I go where I want.

That I said that she was tired.

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES
Then First I eat, and then I go.
If I won‟t go out with you if you come back late.
If you come back late, I won‟t go out with you.
TEMPORAL
Whether I‟m not sure whether he is coming.

Unless I won‟t go to your home unless you come here to pick me up.
CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES
Provided that I won‟t go to your home provided that you come here to pick me up.
As soon as I will meet you as soon as I can.

Whenever I always get upset whenever you come.

CONSECUTIVE Whenever I go there it is always open.

As long as I will wait for you as long as I can.

CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES
While While I was waiting in the bank line, I ate my lunch.
So…that He is so annoying that no one wants do date him. Whereas I was having dinner whereas he was working.

After We are going out to eat after we finish taking the test.

Before I will run home before someone calls me for help.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | CONJUNCTIONS 59

EXERCISES
Complete the sentences herein under with appropriate preposition.
1. This book belongs _________ John.
2. We all went ________ a walk _________ the park.
3. Sam bought this car _______ August.
4. They plan to trade it ________ a new one ____________ spring.
5. He was looking _______ the pen that John lost.
6. Ken usually sits ____________________________________________ this desk.
7. I make many mistakes _____________ spelling.
8. The man walked quickly ________ the room and went ___________ bed.
9. She spends a lot ___________ time _____________ her English homework.
10. We read _____________ the accident ______________ the newspaper this morning.
11. I must write a letter ______________ my aunt.
12. She went ____________ the forest _____________ find some wood.
13. Julia sits ________ front __________ me, and Helen sits ____________ Harry and Hope.
14. The boat moved slowly _______________________ the coast.
15. Everyone laughed ____________ William‟s story.
60 MODAL VERBS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
16. The woman smiled ______________ me very pleasantly.
17. He thanked me ____________ my interest ____________ the matter.
18. How much did they pay _____________________ their new house?
19. They buy everything ______________ credit.
20. She sold it ______________ me, and I bought it ____________ my mother.
21. Do you know what happened _____________________ Martha?
22. You must always listen _____________ your parents.
23. She wants to arrive there _______________ them.
24. What do you like to do _________________ having dinner?
25. I think they were talking ________ us ________ the party last night.
26. Where does your cousin like to go __________ Friday and Saturday nights?
27. His sister has spent a lot _____________ that blue skirt.
4. MODAL VERBS
Modal verbs are special verbs that behave very differently from regular and irregular ones. They
are auxiliary verbs, which along with main verbs give us the ideas of desire, intention,
probability, advice, capacity, permission and prohibition, among others. They have
neither participles nor infinitives. The modal verbs are:
CAN / COULD / MAY / MIGHT / MUST / SHALL / SHOULD / OUGHT TO / WILL / WOULD
 I‟ll get back to you first thing on Monday. Promise

Modal Example Uses Jeff will definitely leave NY after he finishes college. Certain prediction

She can play the piano really well. Ability / Possibility Would Would you mind if I brought a colleague with me? Asking for permission
Can
We can‟t buy a new car now. Inability / Impossibility Would you pass the salt, please? Request

Can I eat here? Asking for permission Would you mind waiting a moment? Request

Can‟t you help me? Request "Would three o‟clock suit you?" "That‟d be fine." Making arrangements

Would you like to play golf this Friday? Invitation

Could Could I borrow your dictionary? Asking for permission
"Would you prefer tea or coffee?" "I‟d like tea." Preferences
Could you say it again more slowly? Request

We could try to fix it ourselves. Suggestion

They could find a nice job if they decided to move. Future possibility

He gave up his old job so he could work for us. Ability in the past * More common in the UK than the US

May May I have another cup of tea? Asking for permission PAY ATTENTION!

China may become a major economic power. Future possibility  Modal auxiliary verbs are always followed by the base form.
 Modals are the same for all pronouns.
I can play tennis.
Might Susan might bring some cookies for us today Future possibility
He can play tennis.

We must pay our bills before the end of the month. Necessity / Obligation  Don‟t use “to” before or after a modal verb. Exception: Ought to.
Must
They mustn‟t go out so late been so young. Prohibition

4.1. MODAL EXPRESSIONS

Ought to We ought to employ a pro to build our new home. Saying what‟s right or correct

Shall I help you with your homework? Offer These expressions are closely related to modal verbs in meaning. They are often interchanged with
Shall *
them.
Shall we say 3.50 then? Suggestion

Shall I go there or will you? Asking what to do

Should We should sort out this problem at once. Saying what‟s right or correct

You really should see a doctor about your illness. Recommending action

Profits should increase next month. Uncertain prediction

HAVE TO
Will I'll do that for you if you like. Offer

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | MODAL VERBS 61

We use HAVE TO when talking about a strong obligation that comes from somewhere else: from your It is used to express a preference.
boss, your parents, a rule at school or work, etc.
Examples:
Examples:
I have to be home by ten. (OUTSIDE – My parents told me so). I‟d rather walk than drive.
I must be home by ten. I have a difficult day tomorrow. (INSIDE – My own choice). Would you rather go out or stay home?
I have to get up early because I start working at eight. (OUTSIDE – It is a rule).
I should get up early. (INSIDE – Now I stay in bed until lunchtime.)
It isn‟t necessary to use RATHER in the question to get an answer with RATHER.
DON‟T HAVE TO means that there isn't any obligation at all. There is no need to do it. Its use is
different from the use of SHOULDN‟T and MUSTN‟T. Examples:
Examples: Do you want to go to the movies? No, I‟d rather go to the theater.
I don't have to get up early at weekend. (I can stay in bed as long as I want).
You mustn't tell lies. (It is very bad to tell lies).You don't have to go with me. (You can go with me if you or
want to.) You shouldn't smoke. (It is bad for your health.) Would you like to go to the movies? No, I‟d rather go the theater.

In spoken British English you can also use HAVE GOT TO and HAVEN‟T GOT TO. The past of HAVE
TO is HAD TO. The negative form is WOULD RATHER NOT.
Examples:
Examples:
Pamela is a waitress. She's got to work on weekends.
Have I got to do it right now? Do you want to go to the movies?
I haven't got to take my sister to school, my parents do it.
No, I´d rather not go to the movies. I‟m tired.

Tip! We do not use HAVE TO when talking about a supposedly good idea that was not yet put into
practice. Instead, in this context we use SHOULD.

NEED
HAD BETTER
When NEED is followed by another verb, it can have the forms either of an ordinary verb (with to do) or
of a modal auxiliary verb (mostly in British English).We can use NEED in the present and future to show
HAD BETTER is most commonly used to make recommendations. It can also be used to express the
following ideas: desperate hope and/or warning people. necessity.
Examples: Examples:
You had better take your umbrella if you want to go out today.
(RECOMMENDATION) I need to buy something for dinner.
That bus had better get here soon! We will need to repair the roof next year.
(DESPERATE HOPE)
You had better watch the way you talk to me in the future! (WARNING)
In the interrogative form, we use it with the hope of getting a negative answer.
Note that it can be used on Present and Future tenses, but always like HAD BETTER. Examples:
Do I need to stay until late?
Does he need to redo the composition?
WOULD RATHER
In the negative, we use it to express a necessity that was extinct or modified.
Examples:

62 MODAL VERBS | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 You don‟t need to hurry; we still have 10 minutes.
13. They ____________ do it last Saturday.
I didn‟t need to ask him for more money.
You won‟t need to arrive before ten o‟clock.
Choose the correct answer.

1. You should study English and Spanish. This sentence implies:

EXERCISES

Use the MODAL VERBS or MODAL EXPRESSIONS that correctly complete each one of sentences (A) necessity
below. (B) obligation
(C) advise
(D) possibility
1. She ________ go to bed early last night.

2. She wishes her boyfriend would dance better. It implies:

2. They ____________ buy some stamps because there aren‟t any at the office.

(A) an imaginary situation

3. We ________________ rush because we are late for class. (B) a situation of regret
(C) a desire about something or somebody
4. ____ I come in? (D) a situation of despair

5. It ____________ rain tomorrow.

6. My mother ____ swim very well. 3. She could call me later. You can say the same thing using:

7. I think you ___________________call her. (A) She must call me later.

(B) She can call me later
(C) She should call me later.
8. I ____________________ go to the farm tonight than tomorrow morning. (D) She ought to call me later.

9. She ____________ not lie to me. 4. I will talk _____ you _____ the last time. Don‟t go _____ this place again!

10. What do you think I ____________________do? (A) on; for; on

(B) to; for; on
11. He ________ have helped us last night. (C) for; in; to
(D) to; for; to

12. I ____________ go if I ____________.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | MODAL VERBS 63

5. Yesterday, he arrived _____ 6 o‟clock _____ the morning and worked _____ 6 o‟clock _____ the
evening. 10. Unless you eat better, you will never get healthier. In the sentence above we have:

(A) at; in; until; in (A) one main clause; one concessive subordinate clause
(B) at; in; at; until (B) one adversative coordinative clause; one main clause
(C) to; in; until; in (C) one conditional subordinate clause; one main clause
(D) at; at; at; until (D) one consecutive subordinate clause; one coordinative clause

6. ABOVE, TOWARD and AROUND are respectively prepositions of: 11. Whether she had traveled to Europe, she would have visited Italy. In the following sentence
we have:
(A) place; way; time
(B) time; place; way (A) probable condition
(C) place; direction; time (B) not probable condition
(D) place; time; direction (C) unreal condition
(D) impossible condition
7. I had a great grade in my last test. However, I have to study more and more.In the sentence
above we have: 12. By 2015, I‟ll have had a baby. If I save money, I‟ll buy a beautiful house, a nice car and get
married with a handsome man. Then, we should build a nice and comfortable home to wait for our
(A) an additive conjunction baby. However, we must work hard to provide him a good future.
(B) an alternative conjunction In the paragraph above we have:
(C) an explicative conjunction
(D) an adversative conjunction
(A) a future Simple; a probable condition; an advise; a coordinative conjunction
8. Although she doesn‟t have money, she insists on spending a lot of it. In the sentence above we (B) a future perfect; a probable condition; a possibility; a coordinative conjunction
have: (C) a future perfect; a probable condition; a possibility; a subordinate conjunction
(D) a future continuous; a not probable condition; a possibility; a subordinate conjunction
(A) a conditional subordinate clause
(B) a consecutive subordinate clause 5. WISH
(C) a comparative subordinate clause
(D) a concessive subordinate clause
The word WISH expresses a DESIRE. In terms of meaning, we can say that it is similar to the
expression WOULD LIKE (although this one is always attached to a condition).
9. Whereas you insist on doing that, I prefer to study hard. In the sentence above we have:
I, You, We, They WISH He, She, It WISHES
We use WISH + PAST SIMPLE to express an imaginary situation.
(A) a final subordinate clause
(B) a consecutive subordinate clause
Examples:
(C) a temporal subordinate clause
(D) an integrant subordinate clause I wish I had a car, but I don‟t.

64 WISH | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

He wishes he weren‟t poor, but he is. We use WISH + WOULD to express a desire about something that you have the willingness to do
but you are unable to control.

We use WISH + PAST PERFECT to express regret or to say that you would like that a situation
occurred in the past could be different. Examples:
I wish it would come home earlier.
Examples: They wish their children would be more dedicated.
I wish I had bought a new car last year.

PAY ATTENTION!
PAY ATTENTION!
When WOULD describes something out of your control, the subject of WISH is different from the subject
It is mainly used to express regret, desiring that things were different. It is possible
of WOULD, to avoid any kind of incoherence.
to use WISH – in this sense – to talk about actions from both the present and future tenses, as
well as and the past tense:
I wish (that) I weren't here now.

We use WISH + INFINITVE in the same way as we use the verb “to want”, although it is much
I wish (that) I didn't have to go to more formal.
school tomorrow.

I wish (that) I had studied harder Examples:

when I was at school.
I wish to see the director.
Notice that the word that can be omitted in more informal speech. He wishes to go out this evening.

EXERCISES

We use WISH + COULD to express a desire about something that you are unable to be or to do. Choose the best possible answer.

Examples: 1. My computer is old and slow.

I wish I could dance well.

She wishes he could be funnier. (A) I wish I earned more money.
(B) I wish I finished earlier.
(C) I wish I had a more powerful one.
PAY ATTENTION! (D) I wish I went to bed.

Past Situations: COULD + PAST PERFECT

Example: 2. Sorry, I've burnt the spaghetti again.

I wish I could have gone to the movies last Saturday.

(A) I wish I were a better cook.
(B) I wish the spaghetti was smaller.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | WISH 65

 (C) I wish I were more intelligent. (C) I wish I was younger.
(D) I wish I wasn‟t here (D) I wish I was an elderly.

3. I must go to work on Saturday. 8. I'm lonely.

(A) I wish I earned more money. (A) I wish I knew more people.
(B) I wish it was Friday. (B) I wish I were on vacation.
(C) I wish it wasn‟t raining. (C) I wish I had more money.
(D) I wish I could have the weekend off. (D) I wish it weren‟t so late.

4. My job is really boring. 9. I don‟t like this place.

(A) I wish I earned more money. (A) I wish I were more powerful.
(B) I wish I finished earlier. (B) I wish I finished earlier.
(C) I wish I had an interesting one. (C) I wish I were not here.
(D) I wish I had a laptop. (D) I wish I could have more friends.

5. I don't have anything to eat. 10. Robert has gone to the farm and I really need to speak with him.

(A) I wish I had a cookie. (A) I wish to go on vacation.

(B) I wish I knew something about cake. (B) I wish he were here.
(C) I wish I were here. (C) I wish it rains.
(D) I wish she hadn‟t gone home (D) I wish I had a farm.

6. I don‟t have much time to finish this. Put the sentences in the correct order.

(A) I wish I wasn‟t working. 1. you – I – wouldn‟t – there – wish – go – .

(B) I wish I had more time. I wish you wouldn‟t go there.
(C) I wish I understood it better.
(D) I wish I was a nurse
2. wish – ten – I – younger – were – I – years – .
I wish I were ten years younger.
7. I feel really old.

3. wishes – could – they – repair – she - come – to - boiler – the – sooner – .

(A) I wish I earned more money.
(B) I wish I was a better cook. She wishes they could come sooner to repair the boiler.

66 WISH | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 PAY ATTENTION!
4. service – wish – hadn‟t – to – I – agreed – do – you – that – .
UNREAL PAST
I wish you hadn‟t agreed to do that service.
 The clause’s order doesn’t change the sense of the sentence.
 It is possible to use unless and whether as a conditional
5. with – wish – we – speak – the – to – manager – .
conjunction.
We wish to speak with the manager.
 In a main clause, would is normally used, but it depends on
6. she – coming – I – with – was – wish – you – . the meaning of the sentence; could and might are also
I wish she was coming with you. possible.

6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

The sentences with if are conditional clauses. They consist on a main clause plus (+) a subordinate PAY ATTENTION!
conditional clause. UNREAL PRESENT
 The Past Subjunctive of “to be” is “were” for all people.
Possible Future IF Simple Present + Simple Future If you study hard,
 If I were you, I would go.
you will learn  If he were you, he could buy a new car.
(possible (subordinate clause) (main clause)
condition) English.  For other verbs, the PAST SUBJUNCTIVE is the same that
-------------------------------------------
(you will get it) SIMPLE PAST.
+ Imperative
Or, IF Simple Present + Can, May, Must +
Main Verb

UNREAL If Past Subjunctive + Conditional If you studied

PRESENT (would) (subordinate clause)+ (main clause) hard, you would
learn English.
(You have a little
chance…!)

UNREAL PAST IF Past Perfect + Conditional Prefect If you had studied

(impossible (would have) hard, you would
conditional) have learned
(subordinate clause)+ (main clause)
English.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 67

 (A) dare
(B) must
EXERCISES (C) ought
(D) have to
Choose the best possible answer.
6. I do not mind ____________ this summer.
1. I ____________ the check-up as soon as I ____________ time.
(A) I work
(A) will do; have (B) working
(B) do; will have (C) to work
(C) did; have (D) no to work
(D) do; had
7. If Johnny _____________ the ball, he ____________ with his childrens.
2. You must not take that medicine. This sentence gives you an idea of:
(A) had bought; would have played
(A) an order (B) had bought; has made
(B) an obligation (C) did buy; had made
(C) a warning (D) has bought; will have made
(D) a ban
8. If I ___________ smarter I ___________ math in college.
3. If I ____________ you, I ____________ with him immediately.
(A) will be; will take
(A) were; would speak; (B) had been; would have taken
(B) were; will talk (C) am; took
(C) was; will talk (D) have been; would took
(D) would be; talked
9. Did you go to Stockholm? No, but I wish ____________ when I was in Sweden. I heard
4. I ____________ you if you ____________ me. ____________ a beautiful city”.

(A) would have told; had asked (A) we had gone; it is

(B) would tell; ask (B) we have gone; it will be
(C) would tell; would ask (C) having gone; it has been
(D) have told; would ask (D) we have been going; it were

5. I‟m sure she isn‟t here. She ____________ be at home. 10. I ____________ to the Caribbean, if I ______________ enough money.

68 IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (A) could have went; had 3. would take; had had
(B) go; had had 4. would have taken; had had
(C) could have gone; had had
(D) could had gone; had
16. They ___________________ go now, before _______________ too late.

11. She insisted ________.

(A) „d better; it‟s
(B) „d rather; it was
(A) on not telling the truth (C) „d better; its
(B) in telling not the true (D) „d rather; is
(C) on not telling the true
(D) in do not say the truth
7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES

12. They ___________ go home than ______ here.

The VOICE of a verb describes the relation between the action that the verb expresses and the
elements identified by its arguments (subject, object, etc.). Therefore, it shows whether the
(A) would prefer; staying subject of a sentence is doing the action or having the action done.
(B) „d rather; to come
There are two kinds of voices in English: active voice and passive voice.
(C) prefer to; went
(D) „d rather; stay

7.1. ACTIVE VOICE

13. You ___________ stop ___________ English this year.
The active voice happens when the subject of the sentence makes the action. This is the voice
(A) would; studied commonly used in most of our daily situations.
(B) should; study
(C) wouldn‟t; study Active
(D) shouldn‟t; studying
John delivers the mail.
John delivered the mail.
14. If she ______________ the lottery, she _______________ a brand new car.
John will deliver the mail.

(A) won; bought

(B) win; buy
(C) wins; will buy Active
(D) wins; would buy Joan does the homework.
Joan did the homework.
15. I __________________ the kids to the zoo, if I ________________ enough time yesterday. Joan will do the homework.
1. will take; have
2. would have taken; had

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES 69

7.2. PASSIVE VOICE
EXAMPLES SUBJECT VERB OBJECT

The passive voice happens when the subject of the sentence suffers the action. It is often used in PRESENT PERFECT Active John has delivered the mail.
English when a fact or happening is more important than what caused it. We form the passive Passive The mail has been delivered by John.
voice of the present, past, and future tenses with the appropriate form of the verb TO BE and the
past participle of the main verb. CAN; MAY; MUST; Active She must finish this wedding dress
SHOULD with BE today.

Passive Passive The wedding dress must be finished today.

The mail is delivered by John.

HAVE TO AND Active Paula has to write the letter.
The mail was delivered by John.
OUGHT TO WITH BE
The mail will be delivered by John. Passive The letter has to be written by Paula.

CONTINUOUS TENSE Active Joseph is driving the car.

Passive
WITH BEING
The homework is done by Joan. Passive The car is being driven by Joseph.
The homework was done by Joan.
NEGATIVE = NOT Active His daughter didn‟t eat The cookie.
The homework will be done by Joan.
AFTER THE
AUXILIARY Passive The cookie was not eaten by his daughter.
Often it can also be used:

To describe artistic, scientific and literary endeavors

Examples: QUESTIONS Active Will they deliver the pizzas on time?
AUXILIARY BEFORE
The Mona Lisa was painted by Leonardo Da Vinci.
THE SUBJECT
Research is being done on a cure for cancer disease. Passive Will the pizzas be delivered on time by them?
To explain directions and procedures
Examples:
Poker can be played by many players.
PAY ATTENTION!
Passive constructions are easy to spot. We simply need to look for a form of the verb TO BE (is, are, am,
To describe legal and governmental matters and to avoid placing direct blame: was, were, has been, have been, had been, will be, will have been, being) followed by a past participle.
Examples:
The new “Zero Alcohol in traffic” politics was being discussed. We form the passive voice:

ACTIVE VOICE x PASSIVE VOICE  Of Present perfect sentences with have (has) been + the past participle of the main verb.
John has delivered the mail.

70 ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 The mail has been delivered by John.
 Of Sentences using can, may, must, and should with be + the past participle of the main
verb.
They must finish this work today.
This work must be finished today.
 Using have to and ought to with be + the past participle of the main verb.
She has to send that letter.
That letter has to be sent.
 Using Continuous tense with being + the past participle of the main verb.
She is writing the letter.
The letter is being written by her.
 In negative form by placing not after the auxiliary.
The book was not written by Hemingway.
The merchandise will not be delivered before Tuesday.
 In questions by placing the auxiliary before the subject.
Was the book written by Hemingway?
Will the merchandise be delivered before Tuesday?

EXERCISE:
Change the sentences from the active voice to the passive voice:

1. Sally bought a new house for her family.

A new house was bought by Sally for her family.
2. Paulo opens the door.
The door is opened by Pablo.
3. Richard and Susan will visit their parents next holyday.
Richard and Susan parents will be visited by them next holiday.
4. She has not read the letter.
The letter has not been read by her.
5. She didn't win the game.
The game wasn‟t won by her.
6. My mother is making a beautiful birthday cake for me.
A beautiful birthday cake is being made for me by my mother.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES 71

7. The teacher should open the classroom‟s window. 8.2. INDIRECT SPEECH
The classroom‟s window should be opened by the teacher.
8. They have seen the doctor since he was sick. Indirect Speech is also called Reported Speech and it makes reference to a sentence reporting
what someone/somebody has said. With Indirect Speech there is no need to transcribe word by
The doctor has been seen by them since he was sick.
word. In fact, words such as pronouns and time expressions need to be changed, so they can
9. He stopped the bus. match the new sentence.
The bus was stopped by him.
10. She does her lessons everyday. If the reporting verb is in the simple present or future, the verb doesn‟t change in the reported
Her lessons are done by her everyday. clause. Only the subject and the pronoun will change.
11. He can not help her.
She can not be helped by him. Examples:
12. Does the police officer catch the thief? Brown says, “My car is broken”.
Is the thief caught by the police officer? Brown says (that) his car is broken.
13. I will be studying English all night long.
English will be studied by me all night long. Jack says, “We will have dinner at Marco‟s restaurant tomorrow.”
14. We have not agreed to this issue. Jack says (that) we will have dinner at Marco‟s restaurant tomorrow.
This issue has not been agreed by us.
15. He could not sell that dresser. If the reporting verb is in the past, the reported clause will be in a past too. This form is usually
That dresser could not be sold by him. one step back into the past when compared to its original.

8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES Examples:

The teacher told me yesterday: “If you don‟t finish your test in 15 minutes, I‟ll pick
it anyway”.
8.1. DIRECT SPEECH
The teacher told me (that) if I didn‟t finish my test in 15 minutes, he would pick
it anyway.
Direct Speech happens every time we transcribe exactly what someone/somebody said. This kind
Jane said: “This play is awesome”.
of sentence usually appears within quotation marks (“…”). For this reason it is also known as
Quoted Speech. Jane said to me (that) that play was awesome.

Examples: He has told me recently: “You were in need of special attention a couple of months ago.”

Maria said, “Ballroom dancing classes are gorgeous.” He has told me recently (that) I had been in need of special attention a couple of months before.

“Ballroom dancing classes are gorgeous”, Maria said.

When presenting the Quoted/Direct Speech, as we can easily confirm in both sentences presented
above, it must be transcribed word by word, i.e., no word can be changed and/or omitted.

72 8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 MODAL‟S CHANGES EXPRESSIONS OF TIME‟S CHANGES She said, “I finished the homework”. She said she had finished the homework.
Will Would This That Past Continuous Past Perfect Continuous
Can Could These Those You said, “I was running.” You said you had been running.
Must / have to Had to Today Yesterday / that day Past Perfect NO CHANGE
Shall Should Last week The week before last / the previous week They said, “we had arrived before him”. They said they had arrived before him.
May Might Tomorrow Today or the next / following / previous day Past Perfect Continuous NO CHANGE
could, would, Now Then / at that time We said, “e had been working hard before she We said we had been working hard before she
should, might NO …Ago …Before called” called.
and ought to.
CHANGE Next The following week
Here There Some other verbs that can be used to introduce Direct Speech are: to ask, to report, to tell, to
announce, to suggest, to complain and to inquire, among others. But pay attention! They are
not interchangeable.
In these cases we also have some rules concerning the proper way to change the verb tenses. Pay
attention to the table below.
DIRECT SPEECH INDIRECT SPEECH 8.3. INDIRECT QUESTIONS
Simple Present Continuous Past Continuous
She said, “I‟m teaching English”. She said she was teaching English. When referring to reported questions, we follow the rules presented hereunder.
Simple Present Tense Simple Past
He said, “I don‟t eat very much”. He said he didn‟t eat very much. With YES/NO Questions we connect the reported question using IF.
Present Perfect Past Perfect
He said, “I have just finished dinner”. He said he had just finished dinner. Examples:
Present Perfect Continuous Past Perfect Continuous He asked, “Do you want to go with me?”
She said, “I have been dancing for ten years”. She said she had been dancing for ten years. He asked me if I wanted to go with him.
Simple Past Past Perfect
With WH Questions (why, where, when, who, what), we use the WH Words to join the sentences.
PAY ATTENTION!
When reporting a question in the Indirect Speech everything that relates to the question Examples:
structure will disappear. The reported sentence will not look like a question anymore.
They asked, “Where did you go last weekend?”
Reported commands
They asked us where we had gone the previous weekend.
To put a command into Reported Speech, the most common way to
do it is to use: form of TO TELL + TO + INFINITIVE.
The basic reporting verb used in Indirect Questions is TO ASK, but it can vary by using the verbs
AFFIRMATIVE COMMAND: Mother: "Do your homework."
TO ENQUIRE and TO WANTO TO KNOW.
Reported: My mother told me to do my homework.
NEGATIVE COMMAND: Teacher: "Don't talk with your neighbor."
Reported: The teacher told me not to talk with my neighbor.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES 73

EXERCISES (C) Barbra tells me she was watching a talk show.
Choose the best possible answer. (D) Barbra told me she was watching a talk show.

1. Joshua: “Mary is home”. 6. Alice: “I‟ve spent a lot to buy this LCD”.

(A) Joshua tells that Mary is home. (A) Alice complained that she had spent a lot to buy that LCD.
(B) Joshua told that Mary was home. (B) Alice complained that she had spent a lot to buy this LCD.
(C) Joshua said that Mary was home. (C) Alice complained that she spent a lot to buy that LCD.
(D) Joshua says that Mary was home. (D) Alice complained that she spent a lot to buy this LCD.

2. Peggy: “The girls helped in the house”. 7. Cindy: “When did you come”?

(A) Peggy told me that the girls had helped in the house. (A) Cindy wants to know when I had come.
(B) Peggy told me that the girls helped in the house. (B) Cindy wanted to know when I had come.
(C) Peggy said that the girls had been helping in the house. (C) Cindy wanted to know when I came.
(D) Peggy says that the girls were helping in the house. (D) Cindy wants to know when I came.

3. Christopher: “Do you want to dance”? 8. David: “Robert was ill”?

(A) Christopher asked her if she wants to dance. (A) David said Robert was ill.
(B) Christopher asked me if I want to dance. (B) David said Robert had been ill.
(C) Christopher asked me if I wanted to dance. (C) David says Robert had been ill.
(D) Christopher asked her if she want to dance. (D) David says Robert was ill.

4. Liz: “Tom went downtown an hour ago”. 9. Clair: “I didn't have time to do my homework”.

(A) Liz said that Tom went downtown an hour before. (A) Clair remarked that she hadn't had time to do her homework.
(B) Liz said that Tom was going downtown an hour before. (B) Clair remarked that she didn‟t have time to do her homework.
(C) Liz said that Tom had gone downtown an hour ago. (C) Clair remarked that she hadn't time to do her homework.
(D) Liz said that Tom had go downtown an hour ago. (D) Clair remarked that she wasn‟t having time to do her homework.

5. Barbra: “I'm watching a talk show”. 10. Joseph and Joe: “We will do our best in the exams tomorrow”.

(A) Barbra said to me that she is watching a talk show. (A) Joseph and Joe told me they have to do their best in the exams the next day.
(B) Barbra says me that she was watching a talk show. (B) Joseph and Joe told me they will do their best in the exams the next day.

74 8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (C) Joseph and Joe told me they would do their best in the exams the next day.
(D) Joseph and Joe told me they‟re going to do their best in the exams the next day.
11. Daniel: “Will it rain tomorrow”?
PAY ATTENTION!
When a n app ositive c omes after a noun, in the midd le of a sentence, it appea r s
between comas. When it comes at the end of a sentence, we sepa rate it fr om the
noun with a coma. When it comes b efore the noun it ha s one comma a fter itself. The
use of br ackets or das hes instead of c om mas als o empha sizes the a ppos itive.

(A) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it would rain today.

(B) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it will rain today.
However , there ar e some apposit ives that can‟t be omitted from the sentences, as they
(C) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it may rain today.
affect their basic meaning. They are called restrictive appositives and, therefore, they should
(D) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it might rain today.
not be set off by commas.

12. Chandler: “My wife and I definitely don‟t like to eat here.”
Robert‟s sister Rachel started studying to become a nurse after his other sister Alice got seriously
sick.
(A) Chandler complained that they didn‟t like to eat here.
(B) Chandler complained that they didn‟t like to eat there.
EXERCISE:
(C) Chandler complained that they don‟t like to eat there.
(D) Chandler complained that they don‟t like to eat here. Combine the following sentences below into a single clear sentence.

8. APPOSITIVE
An appositive is a word, or group of words, that identifies or renames the noun – subject or object
– which commonly appears right after it and offers concise ways of describing or defining a person,
place or thing. In fact, it may be looked upon as a simplified adjective clause that serves to identify
the subject. Occasionally, it can be found in the beginning of the sentence, before the noun that it
wants to identify. The appositive can be a short or long combination of words.
After the noun → My dog, a little female poodle that I bought one month ago , is running around
the kitchen table. OR Roxanne argued with Josh, her fifteen years old messy son.
a) Marilia is a single woman. / Marilia always helped her friends with their marriage.
________________________________________________________________________________
b) Mike is a shy guy. / Mike is the best dancer we have in our dance class.
________________________________________________________________________________
c) William was an excellent student in high school. / William isn‟t working due to his drugs
addiction.
________________________________________________________________________________
d) Cole is the priest of my church. / Cole is helping homeless kids.
________________________________________________________________________________.

Before the noun → Being a funny guy, Tom wants to be a comedian at that famous Italian show.
OR Intending to stay home on Saturday, Joan turned off her mobile.
e) Raphael is a sneaky boy. / Raphael is a creepy boy. / Raphael was following Susan yesterday.
________________________________________________________________________________
f) Bruno is a peaceful man. / He is a shy young man. / He was the army‟s best shooter.
_______________________________________________________________________________.
g) John is a private detective. / He found new evidences about Nicole‟s murder.
________________________________________________________________________________.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | APPOSITIVE 75

h) Helen was a great cooker. / She opened a restaurant at the most crowded street of
Copacabana. Judy and her dog run on the beach every morning.
________________________________________________________________________________ They run on the beach every morning. Compound Subject
i) Madonna is a famous ballerina. / She is a successful singer. / I once saw Madonna. Family photos cover the girl‟s bedroom walls.
_______________________________________________________________________________
j) Adolfo is an elderly. / He is a grouchy man. / Adolfo bought a dog named Snoopy.
Some times the subject is implied or, in other words, it doesn‟t appear in the sentence. This is the
________________________________________________________________________________ case of the subject of imperative sentences. Imperative sentences differ from conventional ones.
k) My brother is 14 years old. / Pablo is famous at home for his “midnight snack”. They give a command or an order and they always have the same subject – YOU. This subject is
not expressed, it is merely understood.

ADVANCED LEVEL Examples:

Be quiet! OR
Stand still! OR
Don‟t touch that! OR
1. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE Listen to me! OR
Every sentence consists on a group of words, which expresses a complete thought or idea and is
Shut up! OR
constituted by, at least, two parts: a subject and a predicate.
Look at him!

1.1. SUBJECT
The subject is one of the two main constituents of a clause. It says what or whom the sentence is
referring to. Every subject is built around at least one noun or pronoun that governs
agreement – forms and number – regarding the verb or auxiliary verb. There are simple
subjects – when they consist of one noun or a singular pronoun – and compound subjects – when
they consist of more than one noun or a plural pronoun.
Notice that on these examples the pronoun (YOU) is always implied – it is not written – because
the person who is giving the order is talking directly with the person who is receiving it. Thus, they
are in the same context.
1. 1.1 FORMS OF SUBJECT
The subject can be realized, or taken to effect, according to the following forms.

Determiner less noun phrase – also called a bare noun phrase.

Example: Teachers are at work.
Examples:
Determiner + noun phrase – this is usually called a determiner phrase.
Example: The large move truck stopped outside our house.
Judy runs on the beach every day.
Simple Subject
She runs on the beach every day.
Gerund – always ended with ING.

76 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Example: Dreaming is a pleasure.
PAY ATTENTION!
His constant hammering was very annoying.
To determine the subject of a sentence, first isolate the verb and then make a question by
Infinitive – allow question words like whom or who. placing “who?” or “what?” before it. The answer will be the subject.
Example: To eat is easier than to cook.
Who to hire is a difficult question.
Full Clause – introduced by the complement that and containing a subject and a 1.3. SUBJECT COMPLEMENT
predicate itself.
Example: That he had saved the child was known by everyone. A subject complement is a part of a sentence that describes or identifies the subject. It
can be a noun, adjective, adverb or noun clause, completed with their optional
modifiers. A subject complement usually follows a linking verb.
Direct Quotation – used identically as if they were being applied to the direct speech.
Examples:
Example: I love you is hard to hear these days.
Coca-Cola is addicting.
This is my last chance.
Expletive – these are words like it or there when they don't refer to anything or anyplace. His problem is that he missed the last three CSI episodes.
Example: It rains.

Cataphoric IT – this is the use of it when co-referring to a subordinate clause that comes after it.
Example: It was known by everyone (that) he had travelled the world.
1.2. PREDICATE
sentence and it modifies the subject,
A predicate is one of the two main parts of a
including the verb, objects, or phrases governed by the verb. It describes the
property of the person or thing referred to by the subject or the situation in which this
person or thing plays some rule. A predicate serves to make an assertion or denial
about the subject of the sentence and must contain a verb that requires, permits, or
precludes other sentence elements to complete it. Thus, it tells the action or condition.
There are simple predicates – when there is only one verb pertaining to the object –
and compound predicates – when there is more than one verb pertaining to the same
object.
Judy reads the book.  Simple Predicate
They walked through the art gallery and admired the sculptures.  Compound Predicate
2. OBJECTS OF SENTENCE
When nouns are not subjects they are usually objects and they are often part of the
sentence predicate. Some predicates include action verbs that can stand alone in
the sentence, such as: “Sarah cried” or “John ate”.
However, there are quite a few verbs that can‟t stand alone, requiring another word or
phrase in order to complete the sentence and its sense – the noun or pronoun that help
these verbs are called objects.
An example of an object can be seen in the sentence “Jim bought a car”. The verb
“bought” can‟t stand alone in the sentence or the sentence would have no sense. There
are three kinds of objects: Direct Object; Indirect Object; and Object of Preposition.
2.1. DIRECT OBJECT
Whatever the subject of the sentence does, its action is done directly over the object –
noun and/or pronoun that receive the action of a verb. Therefore, the direct object refers
to a person or thing affected by the action of the verb placed directly after a
verb; unless the sentence contains an indirect object. A direct object answers the
questions about “whom” or "what" is being targeted by the action.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | OBJECTS OF SENTENCE 77

Examples: From the beginning of the storm, Dorothy was sure she would make it home.
I bought candles. (beginning and storm – object of prepositions from and of)
Bill threw the ball to Cindy. The SWAT team will hide until sunrise.
(sunrise – object of preposition until)

PAY ATTENTION!
Bill gave a car to Fernando and me for us to go to the hospital.
There is a clear difference between a subject and a direct object. A direct object
(Fernando and me – object of preposition to)
receives the action, whereas the subject is performing the action (where an action verb
is involved)..

PAY ATTENTION!
An object of a preposition can cause confusion in the comprehension of the
2.2 INDIRECT OBJECT structure section because it can be mistaken for the subject of a sentence.
Example: To Jane the wedding request was a big surprise.
Indirect objects, like all objects, must be nouns or pronouns. They are included in sentences when
the subject of the sentence practices an action (direct object) over something or someone
Pay Attention  Jane is not the subject of this sentence!
indirectly. It refers to a person or things who/which receive the said action.
To = preposition; Jane = object of preposition; The weeding request = subject of
Examples: the sentence.

I lent Sally my tools. (My tools – direct object; Sally – indirect object)
Joshua sent Emma a postcard. (A postcard – direct object; Emma – indirect object) 3. VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES

These are words that seem to carry the idea of action or being, although they don‟t essentially
PAY ATTENTION! function as a true verb. There are three types of verbals: Infinitives, Gerunds and Participles.

 An INDIRECT OBJECT always comes before the direct object.

 I lent Sally my tools ≠ I lent my tools to Sally. In the first one, Sally is an indirect
object and in the second, to Sally is a prepositional phrase. 3.1. INFINITIVE

An infinitive functions as a noun, but we typically call it a verbal – a form that is based on a verb
2.3. OBJECTS OF PREPOSITIONS
and expresses action or a state of being.

Every preposition has an object. An object of preposition is a noun or pronoun that

receives the action of the subject in the sentence, coming after the preposition to form
a prepositional phrase. The crucial difference between direct objects and objects of
prepositions is that the second one occurs after a preposition; therefore without the
preposition they don‟t make any sense.
Examples:
An infinitive or infinitive phrase can be the subject of a sentence, though infinitives as subjects are
often considered awkward. It is more common to use an impersonal IT as the subject.
To be honest isn‟t always easy. (subject) OR
It isn‟t always easy to be honest.

78 VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

An infinitive or infinitive phrase can be a direct object or a subject complement.
REMEMBER!
I want to feel less stressed. (direct object)
Some verbs can only be followed by a gerund:
My favorite thing is to spend time with friends. (subject complement)
 I suggest asking her if she can make it.
 He recommends not waiting till the last minute.
An infinitive or infinitive phrase can express a purpose.  We finished writing the report.
Some verbs can only be followed by an infinitive:
Make time to relax.
 You should expect to be there by early afternoon.
We stopped to buy some gas.  Learn not to live in the past.
 I hope to complete the course.
Some verbs can be followed by a gerund or an infinitive with no change in meaning:
Essentially, an infinitive is the basic form of a verb with or without the particle TO and it can not be
 He likes listening to jazz.
inflected to agree with any subject. Infinitives will almost always begin with TO, followed by the  He likes to listen to jazz.
base form of the verb, and these are called To-Infinitives. However, there are infinitives that will Some verbs require an object before an infinitive:
have no TO and they are called Bare-Infinitives.  He reminded me to call my mother.
 The school allowed her to skip the first level.
 I persuaded them not to sell their house.
Some adjectives can be followed by an infinitive:

To-Infinitive Bare-Infinitive  I was disappointed to hear the news.

 He was surprised to get the promotion.

I need you to help me with my homework,

Help me open this window, please!
please!
3.1.1. INFINITIVE PHRASE
I want her to come with me! Come with me, please!
An infinitive phrase is the infinitive form of the verb plus any complements or modifiers.
Examples:
He helped his son to build the tree‟s house. (Used as noun)
Can you show me the best way to sell this painting? (Used as adjective)
The officer returned to help the boy who was screaming. (Used as adverb)

3.1.2. ABOUT PUNCTUATION

When it introduces a main clause, an infinitive phrase requires a comma if it is used as an adverb
at the beginning of a sentence.
Examples:
To buy a basket of flowers, James spent more than he thought he would do.
To go to the States, they needed more money than they thought.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES 79

When it breaks the flow of a main clause, it should be used comma both before and after the A gerund also functions as a noun and it is a verbal that ends with ING. A gerund or
interrupter. gerund phrase can be the subject of a sentence, a direct or indirect object, a subject
Example: complement, or the object of a preposition.

This basket of flowers, to be perfectly honest, was more expensive than I
thought.
These glasses, to talk clearly, are damn expensive!
I love spending time with my family. (direct object)
Living a balanced life is about integrating all parts of it. (subject)
Here are some tips for getting a healthy perspective on life. (object of preposition)
The best part of life is learning new things. (subject complement)
They resented us living a successful life. (indirect object)

PAY ATTENTION!
Be sure not to confuse an infinitive with a prepositional phrase beginning with TO.
Infinitives – to + base verb form: to fly, to draw, to become, to enter, to stand, to catch, to
belong, to understand, to believe, to imply, to infer, to keep, to climb, to dare, to improve.
Prepositional Phrases – to + noun or pronoun and any modifiers: to him, to the
committee, to my house, to the mountains, to us, to this address, to those guys, to them.
The term verbal indicates that a gerund, like the other two kinds of verbals, is based
on a verb and therefore expresses action or a state of being. However, it occupies the
same positions that a noun ordinarily would: subject, direct or indirect object, subject
complement, and object of preposition.

3.1.3. INFINITIVE VERB FORMS

Simple
Form  We had planned to watch all the soap opera.

Perfective  The soccer players hoped to have won the first

Form place of the championship after that last game.

Passive  To be chosen as an Olympian must be the

Form biggest thrill in any athlete‟s life.

Perfective  The woman did not seem satisfied simply to

Passive have been selected as second Brazil‟s best top
Form model.

3.2. GERUNDS

80 VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 3.2.2. GERUND AS DIRECT OBJECT
PAY ATTENTION!
A common error in formal written English is mixing gerunds and infinitives when listing
items in a series. A list of items should either be all gerunds or all infinitives. They stopped singing.
I love watering my plants.

WE CAN SAY Our parents didn‟t like our misunderstanding.

 When he takes time off from work, he prefers relaxing at home, spending Do you enjoy boxing?
time with his family and getting things done around his house. The law forbids kidnapping.
 She can‟t stand getting up late and missing the bus.

WE CANNOT SAY
3.2.3. GERUND AS SUBJECT COMPLEMENT
 He prefers relaxing at home, to spend time with his family and to get things
done around his house.
 She can‟t stand getting up late and to miss the bus. My cat's favorite activity is sleeping.
Among others, our son's best skill was writing.
In a series, either use TO with all the infinitives or only with the first one.
His everyday‟s occupation has been reading.
Her favorite hobby was golfing.
WE CAN SAY
Our first love was swimming.
 When he takes time off from work, he prefers to relax at home, spend time
with his family and get things done around his house.
 We love to sit by the pool, eat a nice meal, have a cold drink and enjoy the
sun. 3.2.4. GERUND AS OBJECT OF PREPOSITION

WE CANNOT SAY Everyone knew that he was devoted to jogging.

 When he takes time off from work, he prefers to relax at home, spend time with The police arrested him for speeding.
his family and to get things done around his house.
 We love to sit by the pool, eat a nice meal, to have a cold drink and enjoy the They always dreamed about going on vacation.
sun.
The FBI arrested that well-known drug dealer for smuggling.
Does she object to working late?

3.2.1. GERUND AS SUBJECT

3.2.5. GERUND PHRASE

Traveling might satisfy your desire for new experiences.

A Gerund Phrase consists of a group of words, which usually are nouns and/or pronouns, modifiers
Studying is an experience (that) I‟ll never forget. and/or noun phrases. A gerund phrase can be the subject of a sentence, a direct or indirect object,
Smoking costs a lot of money. a subject complement or the object of a preposition.
Finding you is always quite difficult.
Learning makes people more tolerant.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES 81

3.2.5.1. GERUND PHRASE AS SUBJECT 3.3. PARTICIPLES

Traveling with your parents might satisfy your desire for new experiences. A participle is a verbal that is commonly used as an adjective and it often ends with ED or ING.

Studying abroad is an experience (that) we‟ll never forget. The term verbal indicates that a participle, like the other two kinds of verbals, is based on a verb
and therefore expresses action or a state of being. However, since they function as adjectives,
Finding a needle in a haystack is as difficult as it sounds.
participles modify nouns or pronouns. There are two types of participles:
Finding a parking space is quite difficult in this area.
Present participles – end with ING.
Learning about other cultures makes people more tolerant.
Past participles – end in ED, EN, D, T or N, as in asked, eaten, saved, dealt, and seen.
The crying baby had a wet diaper.
3.2.5.2. GERUND PHRASE AS DIRECT OBJECT
Shaken, he walked away from the wrecked car.
They don‟t appreciate singing out loud. The burning log fell off the fire.
I love watering and taking care of my plants. A participial phrase is a group of words consisting of a participle and a modifier(s) and/or a noun(s)
Our parents don‟t like fighting with each other. or pronoun(s) that function as direct object(s), indirect object(s), or complement(s) of the action or
state of being expressed in the referred participle.
Do you watch boxing or wrestling on TV?
The law forbids eating and screaming in public libraries.
Examples

3.2.5.3. GERUND PHRASE AS SUBJECT COMPLEMENT

Removing his coat, Jack rushed to the river.
My cat's favorite activity is sleeping all day long. The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifying Jack
Among others, our son's best skill was writing novel books. Removing (participle) his coat (direct object of action expressed in participle)
His everyday‟s occupation has been reading international newspapers.
Her favorite hobby was golfing with friends.
Delores noticed her cousin walking along the shoreline.
Our first love was swimming all afternoon long.
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifying cousin
Walking (participle) along the shoreline (prepositional phrase as adverb)
3.2.5.4. GERUND PHRASE AS OBJECT OF PREPOSITION

Children introduced to music early develop strong intellectual skills.

Everyone knew that he was devoted to jogging with friends.
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifying children
The police arrested him for speeding downtown.
Introduced to (participle) music (direct object of action expressed in participle) early (adverb)
They always dreamed about going with their family on vacation.
The FBI arrested that well-known drug dealer for smuggling undeclared goods.
Having been a gymnast, Lynn knew the importance of exercise.
Does she object to working in our shop?
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifying Lynn
Having been (participle) a gymnast (subject complement for Lynn)

82 VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

PLACEMENT: In order to prevent any kind of misunderstanding or confusion, a participial Examples:
phrase must be placed as close to the noun it modifies as possible. At the same time, the noun The student earning the highest grade point average will receive a special
must be clearly stated. award.
The guy wearing the chicken costume is my cousin.
Examples:
Carrying a heavy pile of books, his foot caught on a step. *** If a participial phrase comes at the end of a sentence, a comma usually precedes the phrase
Carrying a heavy pile of books, he caught his foot on a step. whenever it modifies a previous word in the said sentence. Although, there is no comma if the
phrase directly follows the word it modifies.

In the first sentence there is no clear indication of whom or what is performing the action
expressed in the participle carrying. Certainly foot can't be logically understood to function in this Examples:
way. This situation is an example of a dangling modifier error since the modifier (the participial The local residents often saw Ken wandering through the streets.
phrase) is not modifying any specific noun in the sentence and is thus left "dangling". Since a
(The phrase modifies Ken, not residents.)
person must be doing the carrying for the sentence to make sense, a noun or pronoun that refers
to a person must be in the place immediately after the participial phrase, as it happens in the Tom nervously watched the woman, alarmed by her silence.
second sentence. (The phrase modifies Tom, not woman.)

PUNCTUATION: Whenever a participial phrase begins a sentence, a comma should be

REMEMBER
placed after the phrase.
A participle is a verbal ending in ING (present) or ED, EN, D, T or N (past) that functions as an
adjective and, therefore, modifies a noun or a pronoun.
Examples:
Arriving at the store, I found that it was closed. A participial phrase consists of a participle plus modifier(s), object(s) and/or complement(s).
Washing and polishing the car, Frank developed sore muscles.
Participles and participial phrases must be placed as close to the nouns or pronouns they modify as
If the participle or participial phrase comes in the middle of a sentence, it should be set off with possible, and those nouns or pronouns must be clearly stated.
commas, but only if the information is not essential to the meaning of the sentence.
A participial phrase is set off with commas whenever:
Examples: a) It comes at the beginning of a sentence;
b) Interrupts a sentence as a nonessential element;
Sid, watching an old movie, drifted in and out of sleep. c) Comes at the end of a sentence and is separated from the Word it modifies.
The church, destroyed by a fire, was never rebuilt.

Note that if the participial phrase is essential to the meaning of the sentence, no commas should
Reverse Outlining: An Exercise for Taking Notes and Revising Your Work
be used.
Starting the Writing Process
Understanding Writing Assignments

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES 83

Writer's Block/ Writer's Anxiety Revision in Business Writing
Writing Process Presentation Sales Letters: Four Point Action Closing
Academic Cover Letters Scannable Resumes Presentation
Action Verbs to Describe Skills, Jobs, and Accomplishments in Employment Documents Tailoring Employment Documents For a Specific Audience
Audience Analysis Tips & Terms for the International Student's Job Search
Business Letters: Accentuating the Positives Tone in Business Writing
Color Theory Presentation Using Fonts with Purpose
Cover Letter Presentation Visual Rhetoric
Cover Letters 1: Quick Tips Writing a Job Acceptance Letter
Cover Letters 2: Preparing to Write a Cover Letter Writing a White Paper
Cover Letters 3: Writing Your Cover Letter Writing for a Chinese Business Audience
Designing an Effective PowerPoint Presentation Writing for a North American Business Audience
Effective Workplace Writing Writing for an Indian Business Audience
Email Etiquette Writing Report Abstracts
Email Etiquette for Students Writing Scientific Abstracts Presentation
HATS: A Design Procedure for Routine Business Documents Writing the Basic Business Letter
Job Acceptance Letter Presentation Writing the Curriculum Vitae
Job Skills Checklist Writing the Personal Statement
Letters Concerning Employment ESL Instructors and Students
Management Resumes Grades 7-12 Instructors and Students
Memo Writing Non-Purdue College Level Instructors and Students
Model Letters for Various Purposes Parents
Parallel Structure in Professional Writing Purdue Instructors and Students
Paramedic Method: A Lesson in Writing Concisely Workplace Writers
Prioritizing Your Concerns for Effective Business Writing
Reference Sheets 4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES
Resume Design
Resume Presentation Look at the following pair of sentences.
Resumes 1: Introduction to Resumes
Resumes 2: Resume Sections I was irritated by Bill's constant interrupting.
Resumes 3: When to Use Two Pages or More I was irritated by Bill, constantly interrupting.
Resumes 4: Scannable Resumes In the first, the use of a gerund (functioning as a noun) allows the meaning to be expressed more
precisely than in the second. In the first sentence the interruption itself, a specific behavior, is

84 COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

precisely indicated as the cause of the speaker's irritation. In the second the cause of the irritation
isn‟t clearly connected with Bill, who just happens to have been interrupting. In the second
sentence, interrupting is actually a participle, not a gerund, since it functions as an adjective
modifying Bill.
objects exclusively while other verbs take only infinitives; and others still can take either. Many of
such verbs are listed below, organized according to which kind of verbal direct object they take.
Verbs that take only INFINITIVES as verbal direct objects:

The same pattern is shown in these other examples presented herein under. Agree Decide Expect Hesitate

Learn Need Promise Neglect

The guitarist's finger-picking was extraordinary.
(The technique was extraordinary) Hope Want Plan Attempt

Propose Intend Pretend

The guitarist, finger-picking, was extraordinary.
(The person was extraordinary, demonstrating the technique)
Examples:

Note that in the first sentence, a gerund (noun-function) is used. On the other hand, the second I hope to go on a vacation soon.
sentence uses a participle (adjective-function). In what concerns the meaning of each statement, it (not: I hope going on a vacation soon.*)
is fundamental to emphasize the subtle change in meaning between the first and the second.
He promised to go on a diet.
He was not impressed with their competing.
(The competition – competing – did not impress him) (not: He promised going on a diet. *)
They agreed to sign the treaty.
He was not impressed with them competing. (not: They agreed signing the treaty.*)
(They did not impress him as they competed)
Because she was nervous, she hesitated to speak.
(not: Because she was nervous, she hesitated speaking.*)
The difference in the form of gerunds and infinitives is quite clear just from comparing the
following lists: They will attempt to resuscitate the victim
Gerunds: swimming, hoping, telling, eating, dreaming (not: They will attempt resuscitating the victim.*)
Infinitives: to swim, to hope, to tell, to eat, to dream

Their functions, however, overlap. Gerunds always function as nouns, while infinitives often serve Verbs that take only GERUNDS as verbal direct objects
as nouns. Deciding which to use can be confusing in many situations, especially for people whose
deny risk delay consider
first language is not English.

can't help keep give up be fond of

Confusion between gerunds and infinitives occurs primarily in cases in which one or the other
functions as the direct object in a sentence. In English some verbs take gerunds as verbal direct finish quit put off practice

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES 85

 postpone tolerate suggest stop (quit) Brent started to walk home.
Brent started walking home.
regret enjoy keep (on) dislike

admit avoid recall mind TO STOP, TO FORGET AND TO REMEMBER

These three verbs change their meaning depending on whether a gerund or infinitive is used as the
miss detest appreciate recommend
object. Check the examples presented below.
get/be through get/be tired of get/be accustomed to get/be used to
He stopped to smoke. (He was doing something, stopped and started smoking).
She stopped smoking. (She doesn‟t smoke anymore).
Examples:
They always avoid drinking before driving.
Jack forgets to take out the cat. (He regularly forgets).
(not: They always avoid to drink before driving.*) Jack forgets taking out the cat. (He did it, but he doesn't remember now).
I recall asking her that question. Jack forgot to take out the cat. (He never did it).
(not: I recall to ask her that question.*)
Jack forgot taking out the cat. (He did it, but he didn't remember sometime later).
She put off buying a new jacket.
Jack remembers to take out the cat. (He regularly remembers.)
(not: She put off to buy a new jacket.*)
Mr. Allen enjoys cooking. Jack remembers taking out the cat. (He did it, and he remembers now.)
(not: Mr. Allen enjoys to cook.*) Jack remembered to take out the cat. (He did it.)
Charles keeps calling her. Jack remembered taking out the cat. (He did it, and he remembered sometime later.)
(not: Charles keeps to call her.*)

SENSE VERBS + OBJECT + GERUND OR BASE FORM VERB

Verbs that take GERUNDS or INFINITIVES as verbal direct objects Certain sense verbs take an object followed by either a gerund or a simple verb (infinitive form
minus the word to). With many of the verbs that follow the object, the use of the gerund indicates
start begin continue hate
continuous action while the use of the simple verb indicates a one-time action. Nevertheless, there
prefer like love try are cases when the simple verb can indicate continuous action: this happens whenever the
expression of “a one-time action” doesn‟t make sense in the context.

Examples:
to feel to hear to notice to watch
She has continued to work at the store. to see to smell to observe to sound
She has continued working at the store.
They like to go to the movies.
They like going to the movies.

86 COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

Examples:
I felt my heart pumping vigorously. (continuous action) 2. Did you remember _____ the letter?

I felt my heart pump vigorously. (continuous action)

(A) post
We saw him playing basketball. (continuous action) (B) to post
We saw him play basketball. (continuous action) (C) posting
(D) to posting
Tom heard the victim shouting for help. (continuous action)
Tom heard the victim shout for help. (one-time action) 3. I'm not used _____ up this early.
We could smell the pie baking in the kitchen. (continuous action)
We could smell the pie bake in the kitchen. (continuous action) (A) get
(B) to get
The detective noticed the suspect biting his nails. (continuous action) (C) getting
The detective noticed the suspect bite his nails. (one-time action) (D) to getting

He observed that guy yawning. (continuous action)

He observed that guy yawn. (one-time action) 4. I used _____ to the cinema a lot.

His sister watches him yelling. (continuous action)

His sister watches him yell. (one-time action) (A) go
(B) to go
The priest sounded to me like faking. (continuous action)
(C) going
The priest sounded to me like fake. (one-time action) (D) to going

NOTE: 5. I regret _____ Mary about the wedding.

Sometimes the simple-verb version might seem unconventional, so it's safer to use the gerund
version in the majority of the cases.
(A) tell
(B) to tell
EXERCISES (C) telling
(D) to telling
Quiz: Gerund or Infinitive?

6. Mrs. Jones, I regret _____ you that your credit limit has been exceeded.
1. I remembered _____ the Queen in London, in 1999.

(A) meet (A) inform

(B) to inform
(B) to meet
(C) informing
(C) meeting
(D) to meeting (D) to informing

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES 87

7. Stop _____ this terrible noise at once! 5. MAIN CLAUSE

(A) make A main clause of any sentence is also called an independent clause because it can stand alone
(B) to make as a sentence, without the help of another clause. A main clause contains a subject and a verb and
(C) making expresses a complete idea. All complete sentences have at least one main clause. A sentence with
(D) to making only one clause is called a simple sentence. A sentence with two or one more independent
clauses is called a compound sentence. In a compound sentence, you can join the independent
clauses with a comma and a conjunction such as: and; but; or; although; so; yet; nor; etc.
8. I wanted to stop _____ some presents, but we didn't have enough time.

(A) to
Examples of Simple Clauses:
(B) to buy
(C) buying The steam turbine was invented by Charles Parsons in 1884.
(D) to buying Brazil has won the World Cup Soccer on five different occasions.
The consistent economical growing of Brazil puts it among the developed countries.
9. Look, it is starting _____.
Examples of Compound Sentences:
(A) rain The first thermometer was invented by the German physicist Gabriel Fahrenheit, and the
(B) to rain Fahrenheit temperature scale bears his name.
(C) raining
Brazil has won the World Cup Soccer on five different occasions, so it is the sole five times winning
(D) to raining
champion of this tournament.
The consistent economical growing of Brazil puts it among the developed countries, although it
10. I finished _____ English when I was twenty. still needs to improve in other crucial areas.

(A) learn EXERCISES

(B) to learn
Choose the one word or phrase that best completes the sentences.
(C) learning
(D) to learning
1. The Harvest Moon, the full moon nearest the autumnal equinox, _____________ a period of
several days when the moon rises soon after sunset.
11. She no longer smokes. She stopped ______ about three months ago.

(A) it brings
(A) smoke
(B) bringing
(B) to smoke
(C) for bringing
(C) to smoking
(D) brings
(D) smoking

88 MAIN CLAUSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

2. Like the end of the Paleozoic era, _____________ marked by widespread extinction of species. Example:
As electronic technology rapidly developed, the transistor gave way to the integrated circuit.
(A) of the Mesozoic was
(B) was the end of the Mesozoic
(C) the end of the Mesozoic was
(D) the end was of the Mesozoic
6.1. NOUN CLAUSE
3. On some sailboats ________________ a tiller instead of a wheel for steering.

A noun clause functions as a noun in a phrase. It has a subordinate, a subject and a verb and it is
(A) there is formed with subordinator + subject + verb (+ rest of clause). In a sentence, a noun clause can
(B) has serve the following functions: subject, direct object and object of preposition.
(C) there are
(D) with
6.1.1. AS SUBJECT
4. Even before _________________, Spain had begun to devise an administrative system to
control its empire in the New World. How life began has been a topic of debate for many centuries.
Where she lives I didn‟t know and I still don‟t.
(A) to be over the heroic age Who to go with is my now my main problem.
(B) it the heroic age
(C) was the heroic age over
(D) the heroic age was over
5. Biologically speaking, women are ____________________________ men. 6.1.2. AS DIRECT OBJECT

(A) usually older about In 1978 scientists discovered that the planet Pluto has a satellite.
(B) bound to live longer than She will be there whenever she feels the urge to do so.
(C) used to be older with I‟ve tried talking to you when you were in town.
(D) bound living longer than

6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE 6.1.3. SUBORDINATORS IN NOUN CLAUSES

A subordinate clause contains a subject and a verb but does not express a complete idea. A Noun clauses usually begin with words called subordinating conjunctions or subordinators.
subordinate clause is an incomplete sentence; it cannot stand alone. You must connect it to a main Subordinators in Noun Clauses
clause by using a subordinating word, which is also called a subordinator. Because a
subordinate clause depends on a main clause to express a complete idea, it is sometimes called
how how soon whenever who
dependent clause. A sentence with at least one subordinate clause is called a complex
sentence. Whenever the subordinate clause comes first, it is followed by a comma. however if where whoever
how long that wherever whom

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | SUBORDINATE CLAUSE 89

 how many what whether (or not) whomever How to distribute scarce goods is a central economic problem in any society.
how much whatever which whose
how often when whichever why

EXERCISES
NOTES Choose the option that best completes the sentences.

In some sentences, the subordinator is also the subject of the noun clause. 1. A good college History textbook includes ______________________ about History.
Example:
Whoever bothers to read junk mail is probably wasting a lot of time. (A) every student knowing
(B) should every student know
When a noun clause is the subject of a sentence, there must be a verb in the main clause. (C) in that every student should know
(D) what every student should know
Example:
That goods are scarce is the central fact behind the science of economics.
2. The Counseling and Career Center provides academic and career advising, and it will also tell
NC V
students ____________________ for other community resources.
When a noun clause is the direct object of a sentence, there must be a subject and a verb in the
main clause.
(A) where to go
Example:
(B) where go
Children usually imitate whatever their parents do. (C) where going
S V NC (D) wherever
When a noun clause begins with THAT and it is used as a direct object in a sentence, you can omit
it without changing the desired meaning. 3. How vines climb, ____________________, and what special needs they have, all make a big
difference when deciding where to put which vine.
Example:
Most astronomers believe that some form of life must exist on other planets. (A) when they can be planted
Most astronomers believe soform of life must exist on other planets. (B) they can be planted
(C) can they be planted
(D) when were they being planted
Some noun clauses can be reduced to infinitive phrases. Look at some examples herein under.

4. A female tiger signals _______ ready to mate by leaving her scratch marks ad scent on trees.
Noun Clause:
How society should distribute scarce goods is a central economic problem in any society.
(A) that its
(B) that it‟s
Infinitive Phrase: (C) that is it

90 SUBORDINATE CLAUSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (D) that she‟s Like all clauses, an adjective clause must also have a subject and a verb. Sometimes the subject is
the relative pronoun. Within an adjective clause, the relative pronoun can serve the functions
presented below.

5. They were the only ones to tell me ___________________ the previously arranged spot. 6.2.2 SUBJECT

(A) what to get Frederick Douglass was a former slave who became a leader in the anti-slavery movement.
(B) when to get The big fat lion was the one that attacked many people in the African savanna.
(C) which to get to
(D) how to get to
6.2.3. DIRECT OBJECT
6. She doesn‟t know _______________________ her to arrive to our apartment.
Abraham Lincoln is the president whom historians believe was the greatest.

(A) how many it will take The cat is the animal that many Americans choose as their pet.
(B) how much she will take
(C) how long it will take Note that when WHOM, THAT or WHICH function as the direct object of the adjective clause, you
(D) how long will she take can omit it, with no change in meaning. Check it below.

Abraham Lincoln is the president historians believe was the greatest.

6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE
The cat is the animal many Americans choose as their pet.
The adjective clause comes after the noun(s) they modify. It is sometimes called relative clause
because it begins with words that we commonly refer to as relative pronouns.
6.2.4. OBJECT OF PREPOSITION

6.2.1. RELATIVE PRONOUNS Bermuda is an area of islands and coral rocks to which thousands of tourists are attracted every
year.
People Animals and Things Note that the preposition before the relative pronoun is part of the adjective clause. Use a
preposition whenever it is needed or if you want to communicate a specific meaning. Look at the
Subject who, that which, that
same sentence written in a different way.
Object whom, that which, that
Possessive whose whose
Thousands of tourists are attracted to an area of islands and coral rocks called Bermuda.

Note that adjectives clauses can also begin with the following subordinators:
Therefore, as the phrasal verb ARE ATTRACTED needs the preposition TO, the preposition must
When, Where, Whereby and Why. come before which in the adjective clause.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | SUBORDINATE CLAUSE 91

Note that WHO, THAT, WHERE, WHEN and WHY never follow a preposition at the beginning Note that we use the ING form (present participle) when the adjective phrase is in the active
of an adjective clause. voice. On the other hand, we use the ED form (past participle) when the adjective is in the passive
voice. These rules apply to verbs in any tense.

Note that when an adjective clause is needed to identify a noun, it is called a necessary or
restrictive adjective clause. No commas are used in these cases. Check the example below.
6.2.5. ACTIVE VOICE
Of all living things, the chimpanzee has a genetic make-up that is most similar to ours.

The technology that impacts us most is what we use in our homes.

Note that when an adjective clause gives extra information and it is not necessary to identify the The technology impacting us most is what we use in out homes.
noun, commas are placed on the adjective clause. Commas are a clue that can help you recognize
some adjective clauses. Check the example below.
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, who was born in Johnstown, NY, was an early American feminist. 6.2.6. PASSIVE VOICE

Therefore, when commas on an adjective clause, THAT cannot begin the referred clause. Yellowstone, which was authorized by Congress in 1872, is the oldest park in the US.
Yellowstone, authorized by Congress in 1872, is the oldest park in the US.

Adjective clauses often appear in written and spoken English. A sentence might contain several
adjective clauses. An adjective clause can contain other adjective clauses. Check the following
example.
There are social situations where people who give information are higher in status than
those who need information.
Note that if the adjective clause needs commas, the adjective phrase will also need commas. Check
the following examples.
Crater Lake, which was formed by a volcano, is a superb setting for day hikes.
Crater Lake, formed by a volcano, is a superb setting for day hikes.

Some adjective clauses can be reduced to adjective phrases, with no change in meaning. An
6.2.7. APPOSITIVE PHRASE
adjective clause can be reduced to an adjective phrase only when it has WHO, WHICH or THAT
as its subject.
Sometimes adjective clauses can be reduced to appositive phrases. An appositive is a noun
phrase that is placed near another noun to define it or to explain it. Appositives do not have verbs.
Adjective Clause:
The general who had led the Union Army to victory was Ulysses S. Grant.
Adjective Clause
Adjective Phrase:
One application of the laser is holography, which is the production of three-dimensional
The general leading the Union Arm to victory was Ulysses S. Grant. images.

In order to reduce an adjective clause to an adjective phrase, you must: Appositive Phrase
Omit the subject of the clause (the relative pronoun); One application of the laser is holography, the production of three-dimensional images.
Omit the auxiliary verbs, if there are any;
Change the verb to its ING form.

92 SUBORDINATE CLAUSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

EXERCISES 5. Our town‟s doctor, _______________________ here in 1990, is now moving to another country.

Choose the option that best completes the sentence. (A) whom has come
(B) which has come
1. Hammurabi, ___________________ his capital at Babylon, issued a famous code of laws for the (C) who has come
management of his large empire. (D) that has come

(A) who had 6. That was a historical victory ________________________ before they had gone to fight abroad.
(B) had
(C) whose (A) that has been achieved
(D) whom had (B) who has been achieved
(C) who had been achieved
2. Composer Maurice Ravel based some of his finest works on the Oriental scales (D) that had been achieved
______________________ he was introduced at the Paris Exhibition of 1889.
7. Once, we‟ve tried to get his help but he had traveled to an Eastern country
(A) at which _________________________________.
(B) to which
(C) which
(A) whose name I have forgotten.
(D) that
(B) who name I have forgotten.
(C) what name I have forgotten.
3. When changing banks, credit card companies may assign a lower cash advance limit than the (D) whom name I have forgetten.
one _______________________________ by a full credit line.

8. There were times when we ____________________________________ our own skills and

(A) to a client‟s account assigned abilities.
(B) assigned to a client‟s account
(C) assigning to a client‟s account
(A) stopped believing in
(D) to an account client‟s assigned
(B) stopped believing on
(C) stopped to believe in
4. Large, fast-moving trucks have been known to create wind blasts _________________________ (D) stopped to believe on
a motorcyclist.

6.3. ADVERB CLAUSE

(A) for can startle
(B) can that startle
(C) that can startle The adverb clause modifies a main clause or the verb in a main clause. Like all subordinate clauses,
(D) can for startle an adverb clause must have a subject and a verb. An adverb clause cannot stand alone as a

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | SUBORDINATE CLAUSE 93

sentence. It must be connected to a main clause to make a complete sentence. Adverb clauses Some examples:
begin with words called subordinators or subordinating conjunctions.

Martin Luther King was such a powerful orator that his speeches continue to inspire people many
years afterward.
6.3.1. SUBORDINATORS IN ADVERB CLAUSES

TIME Even though it appears to help some people, doctors disagree on melatonin‟s safety.

after as as long as as soon as

before by the time now that since The raccoon rubs and tears its food underwater, as if the food needed washing.

until when wherever while

NOTE: Sentences with condition‟s adverb clauses called conditional sentences. The order of the
adverb clause and the main clause can be reversed without a change meaning. These two
PLACE
sentences below have the same meaning. Let‟s check them.
where wherever

Malcolm X had been assassinated by the time his autobiography was published.
CAUSE/RESULT
=
because since so that in order that
By the time his autobiography was published, Malcolm X had been assassinated.
so… that such…that

Please note that when the adverb clause comes at the beginning of the sentence, it is always
CONTRAST followed by a comma.
although even if even though despite the fact that
though whereas while
Some adverb clauses can be reduced to adverb phrases, with no change in meaning. Nevertheless,
in spite of the fact that
an adverb clause can only be reduced to an adverb phrase when the subject of the clause is the
same as the subject of the main clause.
MANNER
as as if as though just as Adverb clauses that begin with AFTER, BEFORE, SINCE, WHEN and WHILE are often reduced to
like adverb phrases.
ADVERB CLAUSE
CONDITION When a substance undergoes a slow oxidation, the substance can burst into flame.
as long as if in case whether or not
provided unless AVERB PHRASE
When undergoing a slow oxidation, a substance can burst into flame.

In order to reduce an adverb clause to an adverb phrase we should:

omit the subject of the clause;

94 SUBORDINATE CLAUSE | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

omit the auxiliary verbs, if there are any;
change the verb to its ING form. (A) So
(B) As if
(C) As
NOTE
(D) That
We use the ING form (present participle) when the adverb phrase is in the active voice. We use the
ED form (past participle) when the adverb phrase is in the passive voice. These rules apply to verbs
in any tense. 2. The “daddy-longlegs” spider is omnivorous, ____________________ plant fluids, animal tissue,
and other daddies-longlegs.

6.3.2. ACTIVE VOICE (A) feeding on

(B) feeds on
Frank Sprague developed the elevator after he had improved the electric engine. (C) is fed
Frank Sprague developed the elevator after improving the electric engine. (D) to feed

3. Customers are entitled to receive additional credit services ____________________ maintain

6.3.3. PASSIVE VOICE their account in good standing.
(A) because of
Since it was discovered, penicillin has been used to treat bacterial infections. (B) they can
Since discovered, penicillin has been used to treat bacterial infections. (C) do they
(D) as long as they
4. Brasses are musical instruments that produce tones
ADVERB CLAUSE
_____________________________________.
Because it was once considered a dangerous predator, the wolf has been hunted to near-
extinction.
(A) when lips buzzing the mouthpiece
(B) if buzz the mouthpiece
ADVERB PHRASE
(C) lips buzz the mouthpiece
Once considered a dangerous predator, the wolf has been hunted to near-extinction. (D) when lips buzz the mouthpiece
Please note that an adverb clause cannot be reduced if the adverb clause and the main clause have 5. Common soldiers must follow orders. ____________________________ officers.
different subjects. The following sentence, for instance, cannot be reduced.
Wherever ornamental grasses are used, the garden will have a finished look.
(A) Neither must
(B) Either must
(C) So must
EXERCISES
(D) Then must
Choose the option that best completes the sentences.

1. ___________ golf became increasingly accessible to Americans after World War II, the sport
achieved popularity with both average people and professional players.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | SUBORDINATE CLAUSE 95

6. If a defect can be solved by a mechanic it is a ___________________________________. 11. Maria could barely _____________ with what she _______________ previously.

(A) mechanic defect. (A) get by; earns

(B) mechanical defect. (B) got on; earns
(C) functional defect. (C) get on; was earning
(D) fundamental defect. (D) get by; was earning

7. Your sister‟s lunch ___________ quickly _____________. 7. IRREGULAR VERBS LIST

(A) is; fixed INFINITIVE PAST PAST PARTICIPLE

(B) was; fixing
(C) was; fixed To awake awoke Awoken
(D) is; fixing To be was / were Been
To bear bore born
8. They want to know _________________________ the Internet. To beat beat beat
To become became become
(A) who invent To begin began begun
(B) who invented To bend Bent bent
(C) whom invent
To beset beset beset
(D) whom invented
To bet bet bet
To bid bid / bade bid / bidden
9. At the meeting she said there was no point ____________________ the trade with the Chinese.
To bind bound bound
To bite bit bitten
(A) on increasing
(B) on increase To bleed bled bled
(C) in increasing To blow blew blown
(D) in increase To break broke broken
To breed bred bred
10. Yesterday, we ______________________ breakfast when Michael ______________________. To bring brought brought
To broadcast broadcast broadcast
(A) was having; dropped by. To build built built
(B) were having; dropped by.
To burn burned / burnt burned / burnt
(C) had; dropped on.
To burst burst burst
(D) have had; dropped on.
To buy bought bought

96 IRREGULAR VERBS LIST | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 To cast cast cast To get got gotten
To catch caught caught To give gave given
To choose chose chosen To go went gone
To cling clung clung To grind ground ground
To come came come To grow grew grown
To cost cost cost To hang hung hung
To creep crept crept To hear heard heard
To cut cut cut To hide hid hidden
To deal dealt dealt To hit hit hit
To dig dug dug To hold held held
To dive dived / dove dived To hurt hurt hurt
To do did done To keep kept kept
To draw drew drawn To kneel knelt knelt
To dream dreamed / dreamt dreamed / dreamt To knit knit knit
To drive drove driven To know knew know
To drink drank drunk To lay laid laid
To eat ate eaten To lead led led
To fall fell fallen To leap leaped/lept leaped/lept
To feed fed fed To learn learned / learnt learned / learnt
To feel felt felt To leave left left
To fight fought fought To lend lent lent
To find found found To let let let
To fit fit fit To lie lay lain
To flee fled fled To light lighted/lit lighted
To fling flung flung To lose lost lost
To fly flew flown To make made made
To forbid forbade forbidden To mean meant meant
To forget forgot forgotten To meet met met
To forego (forgo) forewent foregone To misspell misspell / misspelt misspell / misspelt
To forgive forgave forgiven To mistake mistook mistaken
To forsake forsook forsaken To mow mowed mowed / mown
To freeze froze frozen To overcome overcame overcome

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | IRREGULAR VERBS LIST 97

 To overdo overdid overdone To sing sang sung
To overtake overtook overtaken To sink sank sunk
To overthrow overthrew overthrown To sit sat sat
To pay paid paid To sleep slept slept
To plead pled pled To slay slew slain
To prove proved proved/proven To slide slid slid
To put put put To sling slung slung
To quit quit quit To slit slit slit
To read read read To smite smote smitten
To rid rid rid To sow sowed sowed/sown
To ride rode ridden To speak spoke spoken
To ring rang rung To speed sped sped
To rise rose risen To spend spent spent
To run ran run To spill spilled/spilt spilled/spilt
To saw sawed sawed/sawn To spin spun spun
To say said said To spit spit/spat spit
To see saw seen To split split split
To seek sought sought To spread spread spread
To sell sold sold To spring sprang/sprung sprung
To send sent sent To stand stood stood
To set set set To steal stole stolen
To sew sewed sewed/sewn To stick stuck stuck
To shake shook shaken To sting stung stung
To shave shaved shaved/shaven To stink stank stunk
To shear shore shorn To stride strode stridden
To shed shed shed To strike struck struck
To shine shone shone To string strung strung
To shoe shoed shoed/shod To strive strove striven
To shoot shot shot To swear swore sworn
To show showed showed/shown To sweep swept swept
To shrink shrank shrunk To swell swelled swelled/swollen
To shut shut shut To swim swam swum

98 IRREGULAR VERBS LIST | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 To swing swung swung
To take took taken
To teach taught taught
To tear tore torn
To tell told told
To think thought thought
To thrive thrived/throve thrived
To throw threw thrown
To thrust thrust thrust
To tread trod trodden
To understand understood understood
To uphold upheld upheld
To upset upset upset
To wake woke woken
To wear wore Worn
To weave weaved/wove weaved/woven
To wed wed Wed
To weep wept Wept
To wind wound wound
To win won Won
To withhold withheld withheld
To withstand withstood withstood
To wring wrung wrung
To write wrote written

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | IRREGULAR VERBS LIST 99

 8. G A B A R I T O S six – 6 twelve – 12 thirty – 30 a hundred – 100
fifty – 50 thirteen – 13 thirty-nine – 39 eleven – 11
BASIC LEVEL seventy-eight – 78 forty-two – 42 twenty-three – 23 seven – 7
sixty-one – 61 four hundred – 400 ninety-nine – 99 seventeen – 17
2.2. ORDINALS nineteen – 19 forty-nine – 49 forty-eight – 48 eighteen – 18
eighty – 80 ninety-two – 92 a hundred forty-six – 146 sixty-seven – 67
Write the respective ordinals and numerals: a hundred – 100 sixth – 6th twelveth – 12th thirtieth – 30th
fiftieth – 50th a hundredth – 100th thirteenth – 13th thirty-ninth – 39th
Escreva os respectivos ordinais e numerais: eleventh – 11 th
seventy-eighth – 78 th
ninety-second – 92 nd
forty-sixth – 46th
03 – three 03rd – third 15 – fifteen
th
15 – fifteenth 27 – twenty-seven 27th – twenty-seventh 3. ARTICLE
49 – forty-nine 49th – forty-ninth 32 – thirty-two
01. B (a; an; ___)
32nd – thirty-second 11 – eleven 11th – eleventh
02. C (this; the; the)
68 – sixty-eight 68th – sixty-eighth 76 – seventy-six
03. D (the; a)
76th – seventy-sixth 12 – twelve 12th – twelfth
04. C (the; these; the; a)
99 – ninety-nine 99th – ninety-ninth 14 – fourteen
05. C (____; the; the)
14th – fourteenth 100 – one hundred 100th – one
06. D (an; the)
hundredth
07. D (____; a)
1,345 – one thousand three hundred (and) forty-five
08. A (a; a; ____)
1,560,300 – one million five hundred sixty thousand (and) three hundred
09. A (the; the; the; a)
322nd – three hundred (and) twenty-second
10. C (the; a)
2,761st – two thousand seven hundred (and) sixty-first
11. D (an; the)
10,947th – ten thousand nine hundred (and) forty-seventh
12. D (the; a; the)
235,564 – two hundred thirty five thousand five hundred sixty four
13. B (the; the; a)
235,564th – two hundred thirty five thousand five hundred sixty fourth
14. B (the; a; an)
97,783,290 – ninety seven million seven hundred eighty three thousand two hundred
ninety 15. B (the; a; ____)

7,770,777 – seven million seven hundred seventy thousand seven hundred seventy 16. B (the; the; a; a; a; the)
seven 17. B (the; the; the)
18. D (the; the; the)
Complete the numbers according to the example: 19. B (the; the; the; the; a)
20. D (the; ____; the; a; the)

100 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

21. C (____; the; the ) 5. PRONOUNS
22. B (The; an; the)
Complete the following sentences with the possessive adjective that refers to the subject of the
4. PLURAL sentence.

1. secretaries
2. jobs 1. her ; my

3. saleswomen 2. her

4. psychologists ; assistants 3. his.

5. housewives 4. your

6. stories 5. their
7. fungi 6. its ; our
8. girls ; boys ; cities ; countries. 7. his
9. parents-in-law 8. her
10. teeth ; children. 9. its
11.people 10. their
12. Churches ; discotheques.
13. Subways ; buses ; means ; towns. Choose the correct form.
14. disasters ; phenomena 1. them
15. mothers ; feet 2. us
16. kids ; shows ; children lice. 3. We
17. forests ; deer. ; brothers-in-law ; trout. 4. us
18. criteria ; faculties 5. me
19. issues ; conferences ; tickets. 6. them
20. species ; fish ; rivers ; states 7. him

21. indexes/indices ; professors ; information. 8. him

22. godfathers ; buildings 9. us

23.coats ; skirts ; sisters ; attendants 10. me

24. syllabi/syllabuses ; words ; hypotheses ; appendices

25. daughters ; classes ; Mondays ; Wednesdays ; Fridays. Substitute the word or words in italic for the correct object pronoun.

26. Thursday nights. 1. I see him on the bus every morning.

27. photos ; drawers 2. I sit near them during the lesson.

3 All the boys like her very much.
4. I often see you in the school cafeteria.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | G A B A R I T O S 101

5. He always goes to the movies with them. Complete the sentences below with the correct reflexive pronoun:
6. I know them very well. 1. herself.
7. Frank always waits for us after the lesson. 2. ourselves
8. He drives them to school every morning. 3. herself
9. I sit next to him. 4. themselves.
10. We always have dinner with them on Friday nights. 5. ourselves.
6. themselves.
In the following sentences, substitute the words in italic for the correct possessive pronoun. 7. himself
8. yourself

1. These seats are ours. 9. yourself

2. This umbrella is hers. 10. myself

3. These pencils are yours.

4. That fountain pen in mine. Substitute the word alone for the preposition by plus the respective reflexive pronoun.

5. That overcoat is his.

6. Is this pack of cigarettes yours or is it his? 1. He went for a walk in the park by himself.

7. This is its. 2. They made that long trip through the woods by themselves.

8. Are these ours or are they theirs? 3. I don‟t like to go to the movies by myself.

9. Which house do you prefer: mine, hers or his? 4. Helen, however, prefers to go to the movies by herself.

10. Will they go to theirs or ours next weekend? 5. John likes to take long walks in the woods by himself.
6. The old couple lives by itself/themselves in a cottage in the woods.

Complete the following sentences with a possessive adjective or a possessive pronoun. 7. John works by himself in a small office.
8. My aunt, although she is rather rich, prefers to live by herself.

1. his ; yours 9. Do you like to eat by yourself?

2. my ; hers. 10. I went to the opera by myself last night.

3. their ; ours.
4. our ; theirs. Knowing that ONE and ONES are respectively used to replace singular or plural subjects, in order to
avoid the repetition of the said subject, try to solve the following exercise: substitute the
5. my ; his.
expressions in italic for the words ONE or ONES.
6. their ; ours.
7. his ; hers.
1. Those little boys love to read Harry Potter‟s books but, nowadays, they must read these ones.
8. his ; yours.
2. Which T-shirt does your son want: the black one or the yellow one?
9. their ; ours.
3. Look at those glasses. Which ones?
10. our ; theirs
4. Pay attention to the car. Which one?

102 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

5. Let‟s go to the pub. Which one? 7. ADJECTIVES
6. Take care of the children. Which ones?
7. Be careful with that guy. Which one? Complete the sentences using the comparative form of the adjectives between brackets.
8. No one knows the place. Which one?
9. Where are my pants? Which ones? 1. younger ; than
10. I‟ve seen his yacht. Which one? 2. older ; than
3. bigger ; than
6. PRONOUNS 4. better ; than

Complete the sentences using the comparative form of the adjectives between brackets . 5. worse ; than
6. easier ; than
7. more valuable ; than
1. younger ; than
8. more attractive ; than
2. older ; than
9. warmer ; than
3. bigger ; than
10. more expensive; than.
4. better ; than
11. more satisfactory ; than
5. worse ; than
12. wider ; than
6. easier ; than
13. more difficult ; than
7. more valuable ; than
14. better ; than
8. more attractive ; than
15. cleverer ; than
16. hotter ; than
Complete the sentences using the superlative form of the adjectives between brackets.
17. prettier ; than
18. larger ; than
1. warmer ; than
2. more expensive ; than
3. more satisfactory ; than
Complete the sentences using the superlative form of the adjectives between brackets.
4. wider ; than
5. more difficult ; than
1. the oldest
6. better ; than
2. the most expensive
7. cleverer ; than
3. the worst
8. hotter ; than
4. the most important
9. prettier ; than
5. the largest
10. larger ; than.
6. the most ambitious

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | G A B A R I T O S 103

7. the most attractive
8. the prettiest 10. PRESENT TENSE
9. the most intelligent Choose the answer that correctly completes the sentences below.
10. the funniest
11. the coldest 1. D (is working; is studying)
12. the best 2. B (have been trying; haven‟t gotten it)
13. the largest 3. A (is playing; plays)
14. the highest 4. C (doesn‟t have; lends)
15. the most comfortable 5. A (is thinking; say; you)
16. the most difficult 6. A (travels; his)
17. the tallest 7. B (haven‟t had)
18. the best 8. C (hasn‟t he)
9. A (have been living)
8. Organize the sentences correctly according to the adjective categories and orders: 10. C (his; are)
11. C (He has gone to Europe.)
1. This is a cheap small old apartment. 12. C (have been doing)
2. This beautiful smart little young Italian girl is my daughter. 13. B (look)
3. That tall well-groomed round-faced American boy has just arrived. 14. B (is she doing)
4. Their big pyramidal brownish wooden cottage is not so far away. 15. C (has she done)
5. Your marvelous enormous classic German silver Porsche has been sold. 16. B (has she been doing)
17. B (goes)
Make questions for the following answers: 18. B (have been studying)
19. B (haven‟t gone)
1. How much does this T-shirt cost? 20. A (are playing; are watching)
2. How many bedrooms are there in your apartment? 21. B (haven‟t gone)
3. How much are these pants? 22. D (does it run)
4. How long does it take you to come to school from your house? 23. B (has traveled)
5. What is your girlfriend like? 24. A (are you going)
6. How often do your parents-in-law usually call you? 25. C (Is she coming)
26. B (haven‟t arrived)

104 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

11. PAST TENSE 5. C (has just traveled)
6. C (was playing; was doing)
For each one of the sentences herein under, select the only correct option. 7. A (hasn‟t called)
8. D (is thinking; going)
1. B (I had worked a lot.)
2. B (I had gone nowhere.) 12. FUTURE
3. D (She came of age yesterday.)
4. C (A long time.) Choose the correct option to complete the sentences herein under.
5. A (Yes, he had.)
6. C (For a long time.) 1. C (is going to draw)
7. B (have; been studying) 2. D (will meet)
8. C (had left; arrived) 3. C (was walking; met)
9. C (No, I haven‟t.) 4. C (called; had arrived)
10. D (has; bought) 5. D (will have gotten)
6. D (heard; said)
Complete the sentences below with the correct tense of the verb between brackets. 7. D (was playing; rang)
1. has already bought 8. B (retired)
2. got ; had been 9. B (won‟t be traveling)
3. haven‟t finished 10. D (went; was having)
4. had been riding ; met 11. C (were; had)
5. have been living 12. E (leave; left)
6. was running ; fell 13. C ( is going to)
7. had just finished 14. B (are; have missed)
8. were ; doing ; broke 15. E (had finished; came)
9. resigned ; had worked 16. C (checking; has locked)
10. was studying / studied 17. d (will have gotten)
18. C (has taken)
Choose the only option that correctly completes the sentences below. 19. E (went; arrived; had; left)
1. C (getting up; had already watched) 20. D (are; going to catch; remain; are)
2. A (had been studying; called; to go) 21. D (has been calling)
3. C (rang; was writing) 22. D (has gone; to play)
4. D (was watching; was making) 23. A (take)

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | G A B A R I T O S 105

24. B (will leave; is going to travel) f. My He is friendly.
25. C (loves; running) ( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
26. D (did; have) g. I'm watching the late class.
27. A (will have graduated) ( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
28. A (didn‟t go; broke) h. They are running too fast.
29. B (has gotten; to take; hope; gets ( x ) adverb ( ) adjective

INTERMEDIATE LEVEL i. I hope you try harder in the future.

1. ADVERBS ( x ) adverb ( ) adjective

j. Voanews.com is a daily online newspaper.

1. Classify the adverbs below according to what you‟ve just learned. ( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
k. Computers work better nowadays.
( x ) adverb ( ) adjective
Mainly – degree Usually – frequency Where – place
l. He was talking with her in a friendly way.
Deadly – manner Behind – place Maybe – doubt
( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
Almost – degree Tonight – time Rarely – frequency

4. Complete the sentences below with the adverbs that relate to the words or expressions in
2. Find the adverbs that correspond to each adjective:
brackets, and classify each one of them:

Fluent – fluently Friend – --------- Frequent – frequently

a. Sue is completely (complete) crazy about her husband.
Slow – slowly Careful – carefully Rough – roughly
(Manner)
Bad – badly Supposed – supposedly Accurate – accurately
b. Usually (usual), Tom goes out with his girlfriend.
(Frequency)
3. Put an X in the correct option:
c. My daughter went to school yesterday (the day before today).
a. The plane arrived late, as usual.
(Time)
( x ) adverb ( ) adjective
d. I think she is upstairs (on the upper floor).
b. My brother loves fast cars.
(Place)
( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
e. Probably (probable) we will need to go to the hospital.
c. Learning French is harder than I thought.
(Doubt)
( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
f. They have almost (nearly, closely) the same age.
d. That site is updated daily.
(Degree or intensity)
( x ) adverb ( ) adjective
e. My You’ve just ruined my best dress.
( ) adverb ( x ) adjective

106 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

2. PREPOSITIONS 4. MODAL VERBS

Complete the sentences herein under with appropriate preposition. Use the MODAL VERBS or MODAL EXPRESSIONS that correctly complete each one of sentences
below.

1. This book belongs to John.

2. We all went for a walk in/at the park. 1. She had to go to bed early last night.

3. Sam bought this car in August. 2. They have to/must buy some stamps because there aren‟t any at the office.

4. They plan to trade it for a new one after/before spring. 3. We have to/must rush because we are late for class.

5. He was looking for the pen that John lost.

6. Ken usually sits near/at/on/beside/close to/next to/by this desk. 4. May I come in?

7. I make many mistakes during spelling. 5. It may/might rain tomorrow.

8. The man walked quickly into the room and went to bed. 6. My mother can swim very well.

9. She spends a lot of time with her English homework. 7. I think you should/ought to call her.

10. We read about the accident in the newspaper this morning. 8. I would rather go to the farm tonight than tomorrow morning.

11. I must write a letter to my aunt. 9. She had better not lie to me.

12. She went through the forest to find some wood. 10. What do you think I should/ought to do?

13. Julia sits in front of me, and Helen sits between Harry and Hope. 11. He could have helped us last night.

14. The boat moved slowly through/outside the coast. 12. I would go if I could.

15. Everyone laughed at/about William‟s story. 13. They couldn‟t do it last Saturday.

16. The woman smiled at me very pleasantly.

17. He thanked me for my interest in the matter. Choose the correct answer.

18. How much did they pay for their new house?
19. They buy everything on credit. 1. C (advise)

20. She sold it to me, and I bought it for my mother. 2. C (a desire about something or somebody)

21. Do you know what happened to Martha? 3. B (She can call me later)

22. You must always listen to your parents. 4. D (to; for; to)

23. She wants to arrive there before them. 5. A (at; in; until; in)

24. What do you like to do after having dinner? 6. C (place; direction; time)

25. I think they were talking about us at/in the party last night. 7. D (an adversative conjunction)

26. Where does your cousin like to go on Friday and Saturday nights? 8. D (a concessive subordinate clause)

27. His sister has spent a lot on that blue skirt. 9. D (an integrant subordinate clause)
10. C (one conditional subordinate
clause; one main clause)

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | G A B A R I T O S 107

11. A (probable condition) 6. she – coming – I – with – was – wish – you – .
12. B (a future perfect; a probable condition; a possibility; a coordinative conjunction) I wish she was coming with you.

5. WISH 6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

Choose the best possible answer. Choose the best possible answer.

1. C (I wish I had a more powerful one) 1. A (will do; have)

2. A (I wish I were a better cook) 2. D (a ban)
3. D (I wish I could have the weekend off) 3. A (were; would speak)
4. C (I wish I had an interesting one) 4. A (would have told; had asked)
5. A (I wish I had a cookie) 5. B (must)
6. B (I wish I had more time) 6. B (working)
7. C (I wish I was younger) 7. A (had bought; would have played)
8. A (I wish I knew more people) 8. B (had been; would have taken)
9. C (I wish I were not here) 9. A (we had gone; it is)
10. B (I wish he were here) 10. C (could have gone; had had)
11. A (on not telling the truth)
Put the sentences in the correct order. 12. D („d rather; stay)
13. D (shouldn‟t; studying)
1. you – I – wouldn‟t – there – wish – go – . 14. C (wins; will buy)
I wish you wouldn‟t go there. 15. D (would have taken; had had)
16. A („d better; it‟s)
2. wish – ten – I – younger – were – I – years – .
I wish I were ten years younger. 7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES
3. wishes – could – they – repair – she - come – to - boiler – the – sooner – . Change the sentences from the active voice to the passive voice:
She wishes they could come sooner to repair the boiler.
1. Sally bought a new house for her family.
4. service – wish – hadn‟t – to – I – agreed – do – you – that – . A new house was bought by Sally for her family.
I wish you hadn‟t agreed to do that service. 2. Paulo opens the door.
The door is opened by Pablo.
5. with – wish – we – speak – the – to – manager – . 3. Richard and Susan will visit their parents next holyday.
We wish to speak with the manager. Richard and Susan parents will be visited by them next holiday.

108 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

4. She has not read the letter.
The letter has not been read by her.
5. She didn't win the game.
The game wasn‟t won by her.
6. My mother is making a beautiful birthday cake for me.
A beautiful birthday cake is being made for me by my mother.
7. The teacher should open the classroom‟s window.
The classroom‟s window should be opened by the teacher.
8. They have seen the doctor since he was sick.
The doctor has been seen by them since he was sick.
9. He stopped the bus.
The bus was stopped by him.
10. She does her lessons everyday.
Her lessons are done by her everyday.
11. He can not help her.
She can not be helped by him.
12. Does the police officer catch the thief?
Is the thief caught by the police officer?
13. I will be studying English all night long.
English will be studied by me all night long.
14. We have not agreed to this issue.
This issue has not been agreed by us.
15. He could not sell that dresser.
That dresser could not be sold by him.
8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES
Choose the best possible answer.
1. C (Joshua said that Mary was home)
2. A (Peggy told me that the girls had helped in the house)
3. C (Christopher asked me if I wanted to dance)
4. C (Liz said that Tom had gone downtown an hour ago)
5. D (Barbra told me she was watching a talk show)
6. A (Alice complained that she had spent a lot to buy that LCD)
7. B (Cindy wanted to know when I had come)
8. B (David said Robert had been ill)
9. A (Clair remarked that she hadn't had time to do her homework)
10. C (Joseph and Joe told me they would do their best in the exams the next day)
11. A (Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it would rain today)
12. B (Chandler complained that they didn‟t like to eat there)
9. APPOSITIVE
Combine the following sentences below into a single clear sentence.
a) Marilia is a single woman. / Marilia always helped her friends with their marriage.
Marilia, a single woman, always helped her friends with their marriage.
b) Mike is a shy guy. / Mike is the best dancer we have in our dance class.
Mike, a shy guy, is the best dancer we have in our dance class.
c) William was an excellent student in high school. / William isn‟t working due to his drugs
addiction.
William, an excellent student in high school, isn‟t working due to his drugs‟ addiction.
d) Cole is the priest of my church. / Cole is helping homeless kids.
Cole, the priest of my church, is helping homeless kids.
e) Raphael is a sneaky boy. / Raphael is a creepy boy. / Raphael was following Susan yesterday.
Raphael, a sneaky and creepy boy, was following Susan yesterday.
f) Bruno is a peaceful man. / He is a shy young man. / He was the army‟s best shooter.
Bruno, a peaceful and shy young man, was the best army‟s shooter.
g) John is a private detective. / He found new evidences about Nicole‟s murder.
John, a private detective, found new evidences about Nicole‟s murder.
h) Helen was a great cooker. / She opened a restaurant at the most crowded street of
Copacabana.
Helen, a great cooker, opened a restaurant at the most crowded street of Copacabana.
i) Madonna is a famous ballerina. / She is a successful singer. / I once saw Madonna.
I once saw Madonna, a famous ballerina and a successful singer.
j) Adolfo is an elderly. / He is a grouchy man. / Adolfo bought a dog named Snoopy.
[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | G A B A R I T O S 109
Adolfo, an elderly and grouchy man, bought a dog named Snoopy. 6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE
k) My brother is 14 years old. / Pablo is famous at home for his “midnight snack”. Choose the option that best completes the sentences.
Pablo, my 14 years old brother, is famous at home for his “midnight snack”.
1. D (what every student should know)
ADVANCED LEVEL 2. A (where to go)
3. A (when they can be planted)
4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES 4. B (that it‟s)
5. D (how to get to)
EXERCISES 6. C (how long it will take
Quiz: Gerund or Infinitive?
6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE

1. C (meeting) Choose the option that best completes the sentence.

2. B (to post)
3. D (to getting) 1. A (who had)

4. B (to go) 2. B (which)

5. C (telling) 3. B (assigned to a client‟s account)

6. B (to inform) 4. C (that can startle)

7. C (making) 5. C (who has come)

8. B (to buy) 6. D (that had been achieved)

9. B (to rain) 7. A (whose name I have forgotten.)

10. C (learning) 8. A (stopped believing in)

11. D (smoking)
6.3. ADVERB CLAUSE

5. MAIN CLAUSE Choose the option that best completes the sentences.

Choose the one word or phrase that best completes the sentences.
1. C (As)

1. D (brings) 2. A (feeding on)

2. C (the end of the Mesozoic was) 3. D (as long as they)

3. A (there is) 4. D (when lips buzz the mouthpiece)

4. D (the heroic age was over) 5. C (So must)

5. B (bound to live longer than) 6. B (mechanical defect.)

7. C (was; fixed)

110 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

8. B (who invented) 3. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences accoding to the right use of
9. C (in increasing) articles:

10. B (were having; dropped by.)

I wrote ________ letter to my friend yesterday. Today I saw _________ letter on ________
11. D (get by; was earning) dinner table. I forgot to post it.

PROVAS COMENTADAS DE INGLÊS (A) the – the – the

(B) the – the – a
(C) a–a–a
2016/2017 (D) a – a – the
(E) a – the – the
1. Chose the correct alternative according to the use of modals.
4. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences according to the right use of
1. ( ) I was so tired last night but I couldn‟t sleep. pronouns.
2. ( ) She not must help you.
3. ( ) I‟m not sure. I might not go to the movies. Dear friend, thanks for ________ email. It is so nice to hear from_________. Let _________ tell
you ________ news, even though _________ are much more interesting.
(A) V–V–V
(B) V–F–V (A) your – you – me – my - yours
(C) F–V–V (B) your – you – I – mine - yours
(D) F–F–V (C) you – yours – my – his - they
(E) F–V–F (D) my – me – mine – my – you
(E) yours – I – I – mine – theirs

2. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:

5. Choose the Word that best completes the sentence below.
______ Christmas I went to Montreal to see my friend. He lives ______ a boat. Can you believe it?
____________ place I‟ve ever visited was the Netherlands.
_____ the Winter he moves to an apartment _____ the city.

(A) The most

(A) On – in – On - on
(B) The more far
(B) At – in – At - in
(C) The farthest
(C) On – on – In - in
(D) The far most
(D) Since – on – In - at
(E) The farest
(E) From – at – At – in

6. Whick of the relative clauses below modifies the object of the sentence?

(A) The boy who lives near me has four cats.

(B) Stories which end in death make me cry.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | G A B A R I T O S 111

 (C) The idea that she could fly is completely nonsense.
(D) The girl whose father died yesterday will move to China.
(E) I can‟t find the person to whom you talked.
7. Which of the alternatives below best completes the dialogue?
 John: _____ you watch the soccer game on cannel 4 last night?
 George: No _____ it good?
 John: Awesome! The Visiting team _____ score a single goal.
 George: I‟m glad I _____ there. I hate to see a visiting team lose.
 John: I _____ know you were that crazy!!!! Why should the visiting team win?
(A) Do – Is – don‟t – isn‟t – don‟t
(B) Did – Did – didn‟t – didn‟t - didn‟t
(C) Did – Was – didn‟t – wasn‟t - didn‟t
(D) Do – Do – don‟t – don‟t - don‟t
(E) Were – Was – wasn‟t – wasn‟t - wasn‟t
GABARITO COMENTADO
1. Resposta: Letra B
A primeira frase está correta, pois utiliza-se o modal “could” para indicar possibilidade, habilidade
ou capacidade no passado. “I was so tired last night, but I couldn‟t sleep.” Estava tão cansado(a)
ontem à noite, mas eu não conseguia dormir. “could” significa “conseguir” no passado.
A segunda frase – “She not must help you” – está errada pelo posicionamento do “not” antes do
modal “must”. O correto seria “She must not help you.”
Na terceira frase, o uso do modal de possibilidade remota “might” está corretamente empregado.
Pelo fato de o falante não ter certeza de que irá ao cinema, ele pode utilizar o “might”. “I‟m not
sure.” (Eu não tenho certeza). “I might not go to the movies.” (Eu não devo ir ao cinema – sentido
de dúvida ou possibilidade remota.)
2. Resposta: Letra C
Uma questão que cobra o uso de preposições. “On Christmas é utilizado mais especificamente
quando se tem “Day” ou “eve”. On Christmas Day; on Christmas Eve. Todavia, o uso tornou-se
costumeiro com a preposição “on” para Christmas em geral. “He lives On a boat.” (Ele mora em
112 G A B A R I T O S | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
um barco.) Usamos “on” para transporte coletivo: on a boat, on a bus, on a plane etc. Para as
estações do ano, a preposição correta é “in”. In (the) Summer / spring / fall / winter (no verão,
primavera, outono, inverno). Para partes da cidade ou até mesmo regiões da cidade, no caso, “the
city”, que é afastada do centro, usamos “in”.
3. Resposta: Letra “E”
Uma questão que avalia o uso dos artigos. Os artigos indefinidos são: “a” (um / uma – utilizado
antes de palavra cujo som é uma consoante. Exemplos: a cat; a dog; a one-hour break (som de
consoante) e “an” (um / uma – utilizado antes de palavra cujo som é uma vogal. Exemplos: an
Orange, an Apple, an hour (h mudo) etc.) Esses artigos são utilizados para determinar algo
indefinido, ou seja, algo que aparece no discurso pela primeira vez. Na primeira oração, “I wrote
____ letter to my friend yesterday”. A palavra “letter” (carta) é um substantivo contável que
parece no discurso pela primeira vez, por esta razão e tem som de consoante “l”, coloca-se o artigo
“a”. Na segunda frase, “Today I saw ____ letter” (Eu vi a carta...) o referente “letter” é o mesmo
do primeiro “letter”. Utiliza-se o artigo definido “the” (que pode ser usado tanto para substantivos
plurais quanto para o singular). “the” tem tradução (o/a/os/as). Na última parte da oração
(complemento) temos “... the letter ____ dinner table.” (... a carta na mesa de jantar.) Neste caso,
também se utiliza o artigo “the” (o/a/os/as), pois no senso comum, acredita-se que “a mesa de
jantar” seja específica, uma somente. Portanto, a letra correta é a LETRA E.
4. Resposta: Letra A
Nesta questão, deve-se, primeiramente, levar em conta que se trata de uma carta. O destinatário é
uma segunda pessoa “you”. Na primeira frase, “Dear friend, thanks for _____ e-mail”. Deve-se
utilizar o adjetivo possessivo “your”, pois trata-se de uma segunda pessoa. O que torna já a
questão fechada com o gabarito LETRA (A).
Na segunda frase, “It is so Nice to hear from ____”. É muito bom ouvir de ___ . Deve-se usar um
pronome objeto. O melhor que encaixa no contexto é “you”.
Na terceira frase, Let ____ tell you ___ news... (Deixe-me falar a ti sobre minhas novas). Então
utiliza-se o pronome objeto “me” após “tell” e “my” news. (Adjetivo possessivo).
5. Resposta: Letra C
A questão versa sobre o uso dos adjetivos superlativos de superioridade. Na frase “______ place
I‟ve ever visited was the Netherlands”. O adjetivo em questão é “far” (longe). O correto uso do
superlativo de superioridade deste adjetivo é “the farthest”. Trata-se de um adjetivo irregular. The
farthest place I‟ve visited was the Netherlands. O lugar mais longe que eu visitei foi os países
Baixos (Holanda).
6. Resposta: Letra E Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an created a 3D image from them.The
images and model were unveiled at a news conference at the British Museum in London. Scientists
Os pronomes relativos reiteram a informação (qualidade – adjetivo, portanto) do substantivo. Eles
think that most of the footprints are children‟s. There was at least one adult, too.
podem ser: Who (que/qual – utilizado para pessoas); which (qual – utilizado para coisas); whose
(cujo); that (que – usado tanto na posição de sujeito quanto na de objeto, tanto para pessoa Discoveries of ancient man‟s footprints are extremely rare. Scientists say that the discovery
quanto para coisa); whom (que – utilizado para pessoas, ocupando a posição sintática de objeto). will rewrite our understanding of human occupation of Britain and Europe.
Das alternativas apresentadas, a única cujo pronome relativo modifica o objeto da frase (ou ocupa
a posição de objeto é a letra E): I can‟t find the person to whom you talked. (Eu não consigo
encontrar a pessoa com quem você conversou. 24. In the sentence: “The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain”,
choose the correct verb tense.
Na alternativa A, “Who” refere-se a “the boy” que é sujeito de “lives”.

Na alternativa B, “which” refere-se a “stories”, que é o sujeito de “end”. (A) Simple past.
(B) Past perfect.
Na alternativa C, “that” refere-se à palavra “Idea” e está junto à oração substantiva subjetiva “she
(C) Simple present.
could fly” (ela conseguia voar). Em That she could fly (que ela conseguia voar), thatmodifica
“Idea” e está no sujeito da oração. (D) Present perfect continuous.
(E) Present perfect.
Na alternativa D, o pronome relativo “whose” modifica “The girl” que também é sujeito de “died”.

Na alternativa E, o pronome relativo “whom” modifica “person” e este está no objeto. You talked to
25. Chose the alternative that shows a superlative form.
whom (the person). Você conversou com a qual (pessoa).

(A) There was at lest one adult, too.

7. Resposta: Letra C (B) The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain.

A alternativa C completa corretamente todos os espaços. A primeira frase está no passado e é uma (C) Scientists think that most of the footprints are children‟s.
pergunta. Por esta razão, utiliza-se o auxiliar referente ao passado “did”. No segundo espaço, há (D) There are only three other sets of the footprints that are older an they are in Africa.
também uma pergunta no contexto de passado, mas pergunta-se se o jogo foi bom. O verbo “to (E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
be” (ser/estar) no passado e melhor empregado no singular é “was”. Na terceira frase, trata-se de
uma frase negativa, ainda no contexto de passado. Usa-se o auxiliar did + not (didn‟t) para o verbo
“score” (pontuar). Na quarta oração, usa-se o verb to be no passado, conjugando com o sujeito “I” 26. Chose the correct alternative according to the text.
(I was there) – Eu estive lá. Na última, usa-se novamente a partícula “not” junto ao auxiliar “did”,
do passado, formando “didn‟t” para completar a ironia (eu não sabia que você era doido). I. The oldest human footprints were found in Britain.
II. The footprints are children‟s.
III. The findings are quite common.
2015/2016

(A) Only I and II are correct.

Read the texto below and answer questions 24 to 28 according the text:
(B) Only II and III are correct.
(C) Only I and II are correct.
The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain. There are only three
(D) I, II and III are correct.
other sets of footprints that are older and they are in Africa.
(E) I, II and III are incorrect.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2015/2016 113

27. Read the sentence below. (B) I and III, only.
(C) II and III, only.
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an created a 3D image from
(D) II, only.
them.
(E) III, only.

The alternative that correctly transforms the sentence above to the simple present is:
30. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:

(A) Scientists take digital photographs of the footprints an create a 3D image from them.
_________ March 25th she Will be _________ the plane. She arrives ________ 7
(B) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints an creates a 3D image from them. am. Once _________ London she Will call us.
(C) Scientists takes digital photographs of the footprints an create a 3D image from them.
(D) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints an create a 3D image from them. (A) On – in – on – on.
(E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an creates a 3D image from them. (B) At – in – at – in.
(C) On – on – at – in.
28. Read the sentences below. (D) Since – on – in – at.
(E) From – at – at – in.
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an created a 3D image from them.

Scientists say that the discovery will rewrite our understanding of human occupation of Britain and
Europe. Gabarito Comentado

Read the text below and answer questions 24 to 28 according to the text:
The alternative that correctly identifies the pronouns is:
The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain. There are only
(A) Subject – object. three other sets of footprints that are older and they are in Africa.
(B) indefinite – demonstrative.
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
(C) object – possessive. The images and model were unveiled in a news conference at the British Museum in London.
(D) possessive – subject. Scientists think that most of the footprints are children‟s. There was at least one adult, too.
(E) demonstrative – indefinite. Discoveries of ancient man‟s footprints are extremely rare. Scientists say that the
discovery will rewrite our understanding of human occupation of Britain and Europe.

29. Chose the correct alternative (s) according to the use of modals. 24. In the sentence: “The oldest human footprints have been discovered in Britain,” choose the
correct verb tense.
I. We must go to school yesterday.
II. I don‟t think she should buy that purse. (A) Simple past.
(B) Past Perfect.
III. She can to travel with us.
(C) simple Present.
(D) Present Perfect Continuous.
(A) I, II and III. (E) Present Perfect.

114 2015/2016 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

LETRA E. Comentário.
A estrutura da frase é: Sujeito + have + verbo principal (passado particípio) +
complemento. O exemplo, em questão, está na voz passiva, mas encontra-se no tempo
verbal Present Perfect Simple: the oldest human footprints (sujeito) have (auxiliar)
been (verbo to be, marcador de passividade no passado particípio) discovered (verbo
principal no passado particípio) in Britain.
Apenas as marcas dos primeiros humanos europeus encontram-se na Grã-Bretanha.
“The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain.”
II. The footprints are children‟s. É falsa, pois a maioria das marcas é de crianças, não
são todas. Scientists think that most of the footprints are children‟s.
III. The findings are quite common. É falsa. Estes achados não são comuns, mas muito
raros. “Discoveries of ancient man‟s footprints are extremely rare.”

25. Choose the correct alternative that shows a superlative form. 27. Read the sentence below.

(A) There was at least one adult, too. Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from
(B) The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain. them.
(C) Scientists think that most of the footprints are children‟s.
(D) There are only three other sets of footprints that are older and they are in Africa. The alternative that correctly transforms the sentence above to the simple present is:
(E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
(A) Scientists take digital photographs of the footprints and create a 3D image
LETRA B. Comentário. from them.
O superlativo dos adjetivos tem duas formas: adjetivos que apresentam de uma a duas (B) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints and creates a 3D image from them.
sílabas, acrescenta-se –EST. A estrutura é: The + adj.-EST. O adjetivo “old” é de uma (C) Scientists takes digital photographs of the footprints and create a 3D image from them.
sílaba, portanto, deve ter a forma superlativa: “The oldest...”. Outra forma é quando o (D) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints and create a 3D image from them.
adjetivo apresenta mais de duas sílabas ou é considerado um adjetivo grande. (E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and creates a 3D image from them.
Exemplos: intelligent, interesting, stupid etc. A forma correta do superlativo é: the +
most + adjetivo. Exemplos: the most intelligent; the most interesting; the most stupid. LETRA A. COMENTÁRIO.
A letra B está correta por mostrar a forma superlativa “The oldest” de forma correta. A única alternativa que apresenta a forma correta da frase, em questão, no presente
simples é a letra “A”. O sujeito da frase “Scientists” está na terceira pessoa do plural e
26. Choose the correct alternative according to the text. é sujeito dos verbos “to take” e “to create”. Portanto, conjuga-se: they take. They
create.
I. The oldest human footprints were found in Britain.
II. The footprints are children‟s. 28. Read the sentences below.
III. The findings are quite common.
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
(A) Only I and III are correct. Scientists say that the discovery will rewrite our understanding of human occupation of
(B) Only II and III are correct. Britain and Europe.
(C) Only I and II are correct.
(D) I, II and III are correct. The alternative that correctly identifies the pronouns is:
(E) I, II and III are incorrect.
(A) subject - object
LETRA E. COMENTÁRIO. (B) indefinite – demonstrative
I. The oldest human footprints were found in Britain. É falsa, pois o texto diz que as (C) object – possessive
primeiras pegadas humanas não foram encontradas na Grã-Bretanha, mas na África. (D) possessive – subject
“There are only three other sets of footprints that are older and they are in Africa.” (E) demonstrative – indefinite

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2015/2016 115

LETRA C. COMENTÁRIO. (D) Since – on – in – at
A palavra “them” é um pronome object pronoun (pronome objeto), que significa “eles”. (E) From – at – at – in
“Our” é um adjetivo possessivo. Trata-se de um possessivo. A alternativa que melhor
traduz é a letra “C”. LETRA C. COMENTÁRIO.
A questão trata do uso correto de preposições. No primeiro caso, temos a preposição
29. Choose the correct alternative(s) according to the use of modals. “on”, pois trata-se de data completa. Com o dia do mês, utiliza-se tal preposição. No
segundo caso, trata-se de um transporte coletivo, avião (plane). Portanto, utiliza-se a
I. We must go to school yesterday. preposição “on”. No terceiro caso, há horas, preposição correta é “at”. No último caso,
II. I don‟t think she should buy that purse. nome de lugar, London, coloca-se a preposição “in”.
III. She can to travel with us.
2014/2015
(A) I, II and III.
(B) I and III, only.
24. Complete the passage below with the correct form of the verb in parentheses. Then choose the
(C) II and III, only.
correct alternative.
(D) II, only.
(E) III, only.
Name a celebrity and Naomi Stein _____________ probably ____________________________ (1)
then. She _______________________________(2) famous for her photos of John Lennon and
LETRA D. COMENTÁRIO.
The Rolling Stones.
A questão pede alternative correta quanto ao uso dos verbos modais. Nesta questão,
Her new book, The Female Gaze __________________________________________ (3) a hundred
tem de se prestar atenção para dois quesitos: a forma e o uso. O primeiro diz respeito à
estrutura. Em geral, os modal verbs têm a seguinte forma: sujeito + verbo modal + Intimate portraits of different types of women. Last night Dave Weich________________________
verbo na sua forma básica + complemento/objeto. O verbo no infinitivo é “to + verb”. (4) Naomi in New York, where she _______________________________________________ (5) to
O verbo na sua forma básica é sem o “to”. Por exemplo: “to study” (estudar). A forma
Him four of her favorite photographs.
básica é simplesmente “study”. O segundo quesito é o uso. Verificar se está no
contexto de presente, passado etc. No exemplo I, We must go to school yesterday, a
(A) has photographed; has become; is going to present; met; describes
forma está correta, mas o uso incorreto, pois “yesterday” (ontem) não se aplica ao
(B) photographed; became; presented; met; described
verbo modal “must” nesta frase. Portanto, esta alternativa está incorreta. Na segunda
(C) has photographed; became; presented; met; described
alternativa II I don‟t think she should buy that purse. Esta alternativa correta, pois a
forma e o uso estão corretos. Na alternativa III, “She can to travel with us”. A forma (D) is going to photograph; has become; has presented; has met; is describing
está incorreta porque não se deve colocar a partícula “to” de infinitivo após o verbo (E) photographs; became; presents; has met; described
modal “can”.

30. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below. 25. Choose the alternative that best completes the sentence below.

_____ March 25th she will be ____ the plane. She arrives ____ 7 a.m. Once ____ London she will Lucy rented _________ yellow car about _________ hour ago and lent it to ________ students.
call us.
(A) a – a – a
(A) On – in – on – on (B) the – the – the
(B) At – in – at – in (C) an – an – an
(C) On – on – at – in (D) a – a - the

116 2014/2015 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (E) a – an – the
a) C–C–C
b) C–I–C
26. Which alternative best completes the following sentence?
c) I–C–C
My sister spent most of her life _________ a small town _________ the south _________ Bahia. d) I–I–C
e) I–C–I
(A) at – at – in
(B) on – on – of
(C) in – in – of
30. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:
(D) in – on – of
(E) on – at – in I left Rio ________ 2013 and went ________ Salvador an I will get married _________ July. The
wedding is __________ August 25th .
27. Choose the correct alternative according to the use of modals:
a) On – from – on – on
(A) Where are you going this holiday? I don‟t know yet, I might go to the beach. b) At – for – at - in
(B) You have to help me with my composition, it is important I do it myself. c) In – to – in – on
(C) You should to have a break. d) Since – on – in – at
(D) Where is my bag? I shouldn‟t find it. e) From – for – at – in
(E) Would you to pass me the salt, please?

Gabarito Comentado
28. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:

My car wasn‟t big enough, so, I needed a _________ one. My new car is _________ and 24. LETRA C.
_________ than the one I had. It is _________ car in the world.
Name a celebrity and Naomi ___ probably _____ (1) them. She ______ (2) famous for her photos
a) bigger – nicer – better – the most beautiful of John Lennon and The Rolling Stones.
b) more big – more nice – good – the beautiful. Her new book, The Female Gaze, ___________(3), a hundred intimate portraits of different types
of women. Last night, Dave Weigh ______________ (4) Naomi for an interview in New York,
c) the biggest – the more nice – the better – the more beautiful.
where she ___________________ (5) to him four of her favorite photographs.
d) the bigger – the nice – better – the beautiful.
e) the most big – nicer – the best – the more beautiful.
(C) has photographed; became; presents; met; described
Na primeira frase: Naomi has probably photographed them. Trata-se de um tempoverbal em que
29. Identify the correct (C) questions and the incorrect ones (I). Then choose the best alternative. não há referência temporal. Utilizamos, portanto, o present perfect. Na segunda frase, she
became famous for her photos of John Lennon and The Rolling Stones. Trata-se de um tempo
1. ( ) How old Ana is? verbal definido – the past simple – pelo simples fato das fotos de John Lennon e Rolling. Na
2. ( ) Where are going these kids? terceira frase Her new book presents a hundred a hundred intimate portraits of different types of
3. ( ) Are you waiting for us? women. O assunto é o seu novo livro “The Female Gaze”, o qual apresenta (presente simples para

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2014/2015 117

um fato corrente.) Na quarta frase, Dave Weigh met Naomi for an interview in New York mostra
um fato no passado, o qual é paralelo ao fato ocorrido na frase 5, she described to him four of her
favorite photographs. Ela descreveu para ele quatro de suas fotos preferidas.
25. LETRA E.
(E) a - an – the
Lucy rented ____ yellow car about _________ hour ago and lent it to _______ students.
O termo "yellow car" é apresentado pela primeira vez na frase. Portanto, deve-se utilizar o artigo
indefinido singular "a". O termo "yellow car" é singular e "yellow" tem a inicial "y" com som de
consoante. Por esta razão, utiliza-se o indefinido "a". O segundo termo apresentado na frase,
"hour", também aparece pela primeira vez no discurso e o "h" é mudo. Como não se pronuncia o
"h" em "hour" (hora), para o som de vogal, teremos de utilizar o artigo indefinido "an". O termo
"students" está no plural. Refere-se a "students" (alunos/estudantes) em um contexto específico.
Portanto, utiliza-se o artigo definido "the" (o/a/os/as).
26. LETRA C
(C) in - in – of
My sister spent most of her life _______ a small town _______ the south ______ Bahia.
Esta questão avalia o uso de preposições. "A small town" (uma cidade pequena). Há mais de uma
possibilidade de uso de preposição. Podem ser: in a small town ou at a small town. o termo "the
south" (ponto cardial - o sul) é regido pelo verbo "spent" (gastou). Portanto, utiliza-se "in the
south" (no sul). In the south of Bahia (No sul da Bahia). A última preposição utilizada é a "of" (de).
27. LETRA A
(A) Where are you going in this holiday? I don‟t know yet. I might go to the beach.
O uso do “might” está gramaticalmente correto e também se aplica ao contexto indicado. Trata-se
de uma resposta incerta, sem dados concretos relacionados ao lugar. Onde você vai passar o
feriado? Eu ainda não sei. Eu poderia ir à praia. O “might” é utilizado em probabilidade e
possibilidade remota.
(B) You have to help me with my composition. I have to do it myself.
O uso do “have to” indica obrigatoriedade. Como se trata de um pedido, deveria ser escolhido um
outro modal, como “should” ou “could”. Também a resposta à solicitação não faz sentido. I have
to do it myself. (Eu tenho de fazer eu mesmo(a). Como uma resposta dessa para uma solicitação
“You have to help me with my composition.” (Você tem de me ajudar com a minha redação).
(C) You should to have a break.
118 2014/2015 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
O item está incorreto por conter erro na estrutura. Não se coloca a partícula “to” após o verbo
modal “should”. O correto é “you should have a break.”
(D) Where is my bag? I shouldn‟t find it.
A alternativa está incorreta, porque o uso do should (deveria) é inadequado neste contexto. A
pergunta “onde está minha bolsa” requer uso do modal “can” em sua forma negativa “can‟t” t (não
consigo). “I can‟t find it. (Não consigo encontrá-la.) Este é o uso correto.
(E) Would you to pass the salt, please?
A partícula “to” não deve ser aplicada ao modal “would”. O correto é: “would you pass the salt,
please?” (Me passaria o sal, por favor?)
28. LETRA A
My car wasn‟t big enough, so I needed a ______ one. My new car is _______ and ________ than
the one I had. It is ______ car in the world.
(A) bigger – nicer – better – the most beautiful
Trata-se de comparativo e superlativo de adjetivos. No primeiro espaço, há a necessidade de se
colocar um adjetivo na forma comparativa, pois está implícita a partícula “than”. O pronome “one”
revela que o carro, “car”, que eu precisava (needed) é o mesmo daquele da frase anterior. Na
frase “My new car is _____ and ____ than the one I had.” (Meu novo carro é mais legal e melhor
do que aquele que eu tinha). Os adjetivos “Nice” e “good” apresentam as formas comparativas
“nicer” – regular, e “better”, irregular. A última frase “It is _____ car in the world” não se trata de
comparação e, sim, afirmação com o uso do superlativo. (Ele é o carro mais bonito do mundo.)
Para o adjetivo “beautiful”, a forma superlativa de superioridade é “the most beautiful”.
(B) more big – more Nice – good – the beautiful
As formas “more big” e “more nice” não existem pelo fato de os adjetivos “big” e “nice” serem
pequenos (terem até duas sílabas). Obrigatoriamente, quando tais forem pequenos, estes devem
receber a partícula –er, indicadora do comparativo de superioridade. O adjetivo “good” não se
encontra na forma comparativa, a qual é “better”. “the beautiful”, por fim, não é forma superlativa.
(C) the biggest – the more nice – the better – the more beautiful
A forma “the biggest” é correta para o superlativo e não para o comparativo, como é o caso da
questão. “The more Nice” não existe. A forma “The better”, neste contexto, não é apropriada. A
forma correta é simplesmente “better”. O artigo definido deveria ser usado no caso de superlativos.
“The more beautiful” não se aplica neste contexto, apenas a forma superlativa.
As letras (D) e (E) se aplicam às justificativas anteriormente apresentadas.
29. LETRA D Answer questions 25, 26, 27 and 28 accoding to the texts below.

(I) How old Ana is?

Bertrand Piccard and his co-pilot Brian Jones were the first people to fly around the Earth in a
(I) Where are going these kids?
balloon non-stop in 1999.
(C) Are you waiting for us?
I learnt to fly in a balloon in a race across the Atlantic Ocean in 1992 and became fascinated by the
How old Ana is? Está incorreta. A forma correta é: How old is Ana? Where are going these kids?
sport. In the same way that a mountain climber dreams of climbing the world‟s highest mountain, I
Também está errada. A forma correta é: Where are these kids going?
dreamed about flying non-stop around the world.

I spent six years planning the flight and failed twice before we managed to secceed. Our route took
30. LETRA C
us over China, but we could only get permission to travel over the south. This meant going first to
North Africa to catch the right winds. That added 10,000 kilometers, and another week, to our
(C) In – to – in – on
journey. But because of this, our flight broke all the records for distance and time spent in the air.
I left Rio ____ 2013 and went ___ Salvador and I will get married ___ July. The wedding is ____
August 25th. My main memory of the trip is that we lived in the air for 20 days and the rising sun was the most
I left Rio in 2013. (Eu saí do Rio em 2013.) Se utiliza a preposição in no caso de tempo em ano, amazing thing we saw. We had to go out of the balloon‟s capsule, in which we were transported,
mês e algumas partes do dia: “in the morning (manhã), in the evening (noitinha) e in the afternoon three times while in the air to repair the fuel system. We didn‟t have any safety equipment but
(tarde). “and went to Salvador.” (E foi a Salvador). Se utiliza a preposição to, que regida pelo when you are in a situation like that, you just do what you have to do without thinking about
verbo “go" , no passado “went” (ir). Go to Salvador. (Ir a Salvador). “I will get married in July.” feeling afraid.
(Vou me casar em julho). Se utiliza a preposição “in” para meses do ano. The wedding is on Landing was a fantastic moment. I remember when I got out of the capsule, looked at my footprint
August 25th. (O casamento é no dia 25 de agosto). Como se trata de uma data com dia do mês, in the sand. I remembered the astronaut Neil Armstrong who was so happy to put his footprint on
então, utiliza-se on. the moon, so far away from Earth. At that moment, I was so happy to have my foot back on Earth!
(Fonte: Original)
2013/2014
25. What‟s Piccard‟s main reason for writing this text?
24. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:
(A) To warn readers about the dangers of a balloon trip.
I remember ______ names, but they don`t remember ______ . ______ name is Ana and ______ (B) To compare the sport of ballooning with mountain climbing.
name is David. I told _______ that _______ name is Carlos. (C) To recommend ballooning as a means of transport.
(D) To describe the lessons that failure has taught him.
(A) their – mine – Her – his – them – my.
(E) To report on succeeding at something he‟d dreamt of for years.
(B) they – my – She‟s – he‟s – they – mine.
(C) they – mine – She – he – their – my.
26. Why did the balloon fly over south China?
(D) their – I‟m – Her – his – them – I‟m.
(E) them – my – She‟s – he‟s – they. (A) The wind took it in the wrong direction.
(B) The pilots were‟t allowed to cross any other part.
(C) The pilots were running out of time.
(D) The route made the journey shorter.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2013/2014 119

 (E) The route made the journey riskier. GABARITO COMENTADO

27. Why did the pilots get out of the capsule during the flight? 24. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:

(A) To practice what to do in an emergency. I remember ______ names, but they don‟t remember ______ . ______ name is Ana and ______
(B) To watch the sunrise. name is David. I told _______ that _______ name is Carlos.

(C) To mend something which had a fault. (A) their – mine – Her – his – them – my.
(D) To check if the safety equipment was working. (B) they – my – She‟s – he‟s – they – mine.
(C) they – mine – She – he – their – my.
(E) To test their courage in a dangerous situation. (D) their – I‟m – Her – his – them – I‟m.
28. What was the newspaper headline after the balloon landed? (E) them – my – She‟s – he‟s – they.

(A) Balloon pilot flies alone around the world.
(B) Non-stop from North Africa to China.
(C) Magnificent record flight for Piccard and Jones.
(D) New record – 10,000 km in a week.
(E) Balloon pilot suffers a serious fall upon returning.
O primeiro espaço é seguido pela palavra “names” (substantivo plural), logo só pode
ser corretamente preenchido com o correspondente adjetivo possessivo “their” (deles,
delas). A segunda lacuna só pode ser corretamente preenchida com o pronome
possessivo “mine”, uma vez que está seguida de ponto final. Assim sendo, e sem ser
necessário olhar as outras lacunas, concluímos que apenas a alínea A responde
cabalmente à pergunta 24.
Answer questions 25, 26, 27 and 28 according to the text below.

29. Choose the alternative according to the right use of adverbs. Bertrand Piccard and his co-pilot Brian Jones were the first people to fly around the Earth in a
balloon non-stop in 1999.
(A) The meat is cooked very bad. I learnt to fly in a balloon in a race across the Atlantic Ocean in 1992 and became fascinated by the
sport. In the same way that a mountain climber dreams of climbing the world‟s highest mountain, I
(B) It is terrible hot today. dreamed about flying non-stop around the world.
(C) He is driving unusual fast. I spent six years planning the flight and failed twice before we managed to succeed. Our route took
us over China, but we could only get permission to travel over the south. This meant going first to
(D) She writes very good. North Africa to catch the right winds. That added 10,000 kilometers, and another week, to our
(E) I speak German Well. journey. But because of this, our flight broke all the records for distance and time spent in the air.
My main memory of the trip is that we lived in the air for 20 days and the rising sun was the most
amazing thing we saw. We had to go out of the balloon‟s capsule, in which we were transported,
30. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below: three times while in the air to repair the fuel system. We didn‟t have any safety equipment but
when you are in a situation like that, you just do what you have to do without thinking about
She left Serrinha _______ 1968 and went ______ Salvador. She will get married _______ feeling afraid.
Landing was a fantastic moment. I remember when I got out of the capsule, looked at my footprint
July. The wedding is _______ July 25th. in the sand. I remembered the astronaut Neil Armstrong who was so happy to put his footprint on
the moon, so far away from Earth. At that moment, I was so happy to have my foot back on Earth!
(A) on – from – on – on. (Source: Original)

(B) at – for – at – in. 25. What‟s Piccard‟s main reason for writing this text?
(C) in – to – in – on.
(A) To warn readers about the dangers of a balloon trip.
(D) since – on – in – at.
(B) To compare the sport of ballooning with mountain climbing.
(E) from – for – at – in.

120 2013/2014 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (C) To recommend ballooning as a means of transport.
(D) To describe the lessons that failure has taught him. Qual foi a manchete do jornal depois que o balão aterrizou? Magnífico recorde de vôo
(E) To report on succeeding at something he‟d dreamt of for years. para Piccard e Jones alínea C. Não poderia ser: piloto de balão voa sozinho ao redor do
mundo (a); sem parar da África do Norte até à China (b); novo recorde – 10.000 km em
Alínea E constitui a resposta correta, jáque, de fato, a intenção de Piccard ao escrever uma semana (d); piloto de balão sofre uma queda grave em seu regresso (e).
este texto é informar o público em relação ao seu feito – viagem em balão ao redor do
mundo. Não pretende avisar os leitores sobre os perigos de andar de balão (a); não 29. Choose the alternative according to the right use of adverbs.
pretende comparar balonismo com escalada (b); não pretende recomendar o balão com
o meio de transporte (c); não pretende descrever as lições aprendidas com os seus (A) The meat is cooked very bad.
erros e falhas. (B) It is terrible hot today.
26. Why did the balloon fly over south China? (C) He is driving unusual fast.
(D) She writes very good.
(A) The wind took it in the wrong direction. (E) I speak German well.
(B) The pilots weren‟t allowed to cross any other part.
(C) The pilots were running out of time. Regras de utilização dos advérbios de acordo com a norma culta da Língua Inglesa: (1)
(D) The route made the journey shorter. Advérbio + verbo principal: “they always arrive late”. (2) To be + advérbio: “they are
(E) The route made the journey riskier. always late”. (3) Verbo auxiliar + advérbio + verbo principal: “they will always be late”.
“The meat is very badly cooked” estaria correto (a). “It is terribly hot today” estaria
O balão de Piccard voou pelo sul da China porque não recebeu autorização para sobre correto (b). “He is driving unusually fast” estaria correto (c). “She writes very well”
voar qualquer outra região do país. Logo, não foi o vento que o levou pelo caminho (“ela escreve muito bem” e não “ela escreve muito bom”) estaria correto (d). “I speak
errado (a), os pilotos não estavam ficando sem tempo (c), esta rota não encortou o German well” está corretíssimo – alínea E.
tempo de viagem (d) nem a tornou mais arriscada (e). Resposta correta encontra-se na
alínea B. 30. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:

27. Why did the pilots get out of the capsule during the flight? She left Serrinha _______ 1968 and went ______ Salvador. She will get married _______
July. The wedding is _______ July 25th.
(A) To practice what to do in an emergency.
(B) To watch the sunrise. (A) on – from – on – on.
(C) To mend something that had a fault. (B) at – for – at – in.
(D) To check if the safety equipment was working. (C) in – to – in – on.
(E) To test their courage in a dangerous situation. (D) since – on – in – at.
(E) from – for – at – in.
Os pilotos tiveram que sair da cápsula de segurança durante o vôo para reparar o
sistema de combustível. Não foi para praticar o que fazer em uma emergência (a); não Preposição IN, no contexto de tempo, é utilizada para semanas, meses e anos: “in the
foi para assistir o nascer do sol (b); não foi para verificar se o equipamento de following week”; “in March”; “in 2001”.
segurança estava funcionando (d); não foi para testar a sua coragem em situações de Preposição IN, no contexto de espaço, é utilizada para países, estados, regiões, cidades
perigo (e). Como constatámos, foi para consertar algo que estava com um defeito – e bairros: “in Brazil”; “in Pernambuco”; “in the North”; “in Brasília”; “in Ipanema”.
resposta certa traduzida pela alínea C. Preposição ON, no contexto de tempo, é utilizada para dias (da semana ou do mês): “on
Saturday”; “on April 1st”.
28. What was the newspaper headline after the balloon landed? Preposição ON, no contexto de espaço, é utilizada para ruas, estradas e avenidas: “on
the street”; “on the road”; “on 5th Avenue”. Também cabe destacar aqui dois casos
particulares da Língua Inglesa: “on the farm” e “on the beach = at the beach”.
(A) Balloon pilot flies alone around the world.
(B) Non-stop from North Africa to China.
Preposição TO indica destino, finalidade, meta, objetivo.
(C) Magnificent record flight for Piccard and Jones.
(D) New record – 10,000 km in a week. Preposição FROM indica origem, ponto de partida.
(E) Balloon pilot suffers a serious fall upon returning.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2013/2014 121

Posto isto... 03. How did you like the story?
A primeira lacuna é seguida por um ano (IN). A segunda é antecedida pelo verbo TO GO
e seguida por uma cidade (TO). A terceira é seguida por um mês (IN). A quarta e última (A) It‟s creepy.
é seguida por um dia (ON). Logo, a alínea C é a única que responde corretamente à (B) It‟s interested.
questão. (C) It‟s amazed.
(D) It‟s watery.
2012/2013 (E) It‟s heart-broken.

01. Complete the passage below with the correct form of the verb in parentheses. Then choose the 04. How many glasses of water do you drink a day?
correct alternative.
(A) Too little (incontável)
Ranulf Fiennes is Britain‟s best known explorer, and, at 65, the perfect example of the idea that (B) Not much (incontável)
people ___________ old like they used to. He ___________ an explorer since the 1960s. He (C) Not many
___________ 40 years ___________ the world, from polar ice caps to deserts. (D) A little (incontável)
He ___________ many records. In 1993, for example, he and a friend tried to cross Antarctica (E) Too much (incontável)
without help. They pulled food supplies across the ice, ___________ 1,300 miles before they had
to call for help. 05. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the dialogue below:

(A) are growing – was – spent – explored – set - covering. You don‟t look very _______. Are you ill? No, just a bit tired. Did you like the party last night? Yes,
(B) aren‟t growing – was - has spent – exploring – set - has covered. it was quite ______ .
(C) grow - has been - has spent – explored - has set - covering
(D) aren‟t growing - has been - has spent – exploring - has set - covered (A) good - well
(E) grow – is – spent – exploring – set - covered. (B) better - worse ( adjetivos comparativos)
(C) worse - well
02. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the text below. (D) gooder - better
(E) well - good
Most bank employees these days have to wear a uniform. Women employees ______wear a
uniform top and matching skirt or trousers in the company colour, and they ______.wear any
06. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:
jewellery. However, they ______ wear uniform shoes. Unlike some other
financial companies they don‟t have a dress-down Friday, so they ______.wear their own clothes at
What time _______________? Sorry. I don‟t know ___________
all.
(A) do the bus leaves - when is it.
(A) can – can – mustn‟t – don‟t have to
(B) does the bus leaves - when it is.
(B) must - can‟t – don‟t have to – mustn‟t
(C) did the bus left - when it was.
(C) don‟t have to – have to – can‟t - must
(D) did the bus leave - when did it.
(D) can – can‟t – must – have to
(E) does the bus leave - when it is.
(E) can‟t – mustn‟t – have to – must

122 2012/2013 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

07. Choose the alternative that correctly completes all examples below:
___ a bus; ___ the first floor; ___ a ship.
(A) on
(B) in
(C) at
(D) to
(E) for
GABARITO COMENTADO
01. Complete the passage below with the correct form of the verb. Then choose the correct
alternative.
Ranulf Fiennes is Britain‟s best-known explorer and, at 65, the perfect example of the idea that
people _______ old like they used to. He _______ an explorer since the 1960s. He _______ 40
years _______ the world, from polar ice caps to deserts. He _______ many records. In 1993, for
example, he and a friend tried to cross Antarctica without help. They pulled food supplies across
the ice, _______ 1,300 miles before they had to call for help.
Ranulf Fiennes é o mais conhecido explorador da Grã-Bretanha e, aos 65, o exemplo perfeito da
ideia que as pessoas não estão envelhecendo como costumavam. Ele é (tem sido) um explorador
desde a década de 1960. Ele passou (tem passado) 40 anos explorando o mundo, desde calotas
polares até desertos. Ele estabeleceu (tem estabelecido) muitos recordes. Em 1993, por exemplo,
ele e um amigo tentaram atravessar a Antártica sem ajuda. Eles arrastaram os seus suprimentos
/comida através do gelo, cobrindo 1.300 milhas antes de terem que pedir ajuda/assistência.
(A) are growing – was – spent – explored – set – covering
(B) aren‟t growing – was – has spent – exploring – set – has covered
(C) grow – has been – has spent – explored – has set – covering
(D) aren‟t growing – has been – has spent – exploring – has set – covered
(E) grow – is – spent – exploring – set – covered
Por quê D e não B? Logo na segunda lacuna do texto encontramos uma frase que está no Presente
Perfeito (Present Perfect) que, conforme sabemos, deve ser utilizado para tempos indefinidos, ao
contrário do Passado Simples (Simple Past) que deve ser utilizado para tempos definidos. Exemplo:
he was an explorer in 1995 (tempo definido: 1995) VS he has been an explorer (tempo indefinido:
sem tempo) OR he has been an explorer since the 1960s (tempo indefinido: desde a década de
1960) OR he has been an explorer for more than 50 years (tempo indefinido: por mais de 50 anos)
OR he has been an explorer lately/recently (tempo indefinido: ultimamente/recentemente).
02. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the text below.
Most bank employees these days have to wear a uniform. Women employees _______ wear a
uniform top and matching skirt or trousers in the company color/colour, and they _______ wear
any jewelry/jewellery. However, they _______ wear uniform shoes. Unlike some other financial
companies they don‟t have a dress-down Friday, so they _______ wear their own clothes at all.
A maioria dos funcionários bancários, atualmente, tem que usar uniforme. As funcionárias
(mulheres) têm que usar um top (camisa, camiseta ou blusa) com saia ou calças condizentes, nas
cores da companhia, e elas não podem usar quaisquer jóias. Contudo, elas não têm que usar
sapatos de uniforme. Ao contrário de outras companhias financeiras, elas não têm uma sexta-feira
informal, por isso não podem (têm que) usar as suas próprias roupas de jeito nenhum.
(A) can – can – mustn‟t – don‟t have to
(B) must – can‟t – don‟t have to – mustn‟t
(C) don‟t have to – have to – can‟t – must
(D) can – can‟t – must – have to
(E) can‟t – mustn‟t – have to – must
Por quê B e não A ou D? Antes de mais, é essencial saber que: (a) have to = must (ter que:
obrigação); (b) can = to be able to (poder = ser capaz de: capacidade, habilidade). Na primeira
lacuna, a noção implícita no texto é a de obrigação (as funcionárias têm que usar uniforme), logo
must é a única opção possível. Ainda assim, se a dúvida permanecesse, a segunda lacuna tem um
sentido negativo, pelo que a opção A estaria automaticamente elimanada. Ficamos, então, com as
opções B ou D. A terceira lacuna está inserida numa frase que começa com a palavra however
(contudo, no entanto, porém), que sempre inicia orações adversativas (contrárias ao que foi
anteriormente exposto). Logo, a opção B seria a única capaz de responder cabalmente a esta
questão.
03. How did they like the story?
O que você achou da história/estória?
(A) It‟s creepy.
[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2012/2013 123
 (B) It‟s interested. 05. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the dialogue below:
(C) It‟s amazed.
You don‟t look very _______. Are you ill?
(D) It‟s watery.
No, just a bit tired.
(E) It‟s heart-broken.
Did you like the party last night?
Yes, it was quite _______.
Para responder a esta questão é necessário saber a diferença entre DID YOU LIKE? e HOW DID
Você não parece muito bem. Está doente?
YOU LIKE? A primeira traduz-se como: você gostou? A segunda traduz-se como: o que você
achou? Portanto, para a primeira sempre teremos respostas do tipo: yes, I did OR no, I didn‟t. Para Não, só um pouco cansado.
a segunda sempre seremos solicitados a emitir a nossa opinião. Assim sendo, devemos dizer o que Você gostou da festa ontem à noite?
pensamos sobre a história/estória. Analisemos, então, cada uma das alíneas. (a) É Sim, foi bastante boa.
assustadora/repugnante. (b) É interessado/interessada. It‟s interesting seria uma reposta correta.
(c) É espantado/maravilhado. It‟s amazing seria uma resposta correta. (d) É aguado/aquoso
(adjetivo que não classifica histórias/estórias). (e) É inconsolável (adjetivo que não classifica (A) good – well
histórias/estórias). It‟s heartbreaking seria uma resposta correta. (B) better – worse
(C) worse – well
04. How many glasses of water do you drink a day? (D) gooder – better
(E) well – good
Quantos copos de água você bebe por dia?

(A) Too little
(B) Not much
(C) Not many
(D) A little
(E) Too much
Nesta questão teremos que saber distinguir entre nomes contáveis e incontáveis. Ao mesmo
tempo, é fundamental saber quais são os quantitativos da língua Inglesa (contáveis: many, few;
incontáveis: much, little). O substantivo “água” é incontável em Inglês, pelo que dizemos much
water (muita água) e little water (pouca água) ou a little water (um pouco de água). Já a
expressão glasses of water (copos de água) é contável, pelo que dizemos many glasses of water
(muitos copos de água) e few glasses of water (poucos copos de água). Olhemos para cada uma
das alíneas. (a) Pouca demais ou pouquíssima. Too few (poucos demais ou pouquíssimos) seria
uma resposta correta. (b) Não muita. (c) Não muitos. (d) Um pouco. A few (uns poucos, poucos)
seria uma resposta correta. (e) Demasiada ou demasiado. Too many ( demasiados) seria uma
resposta correta.
Nesta questão abordamos os adjetivos da língua Inglesa. Primeiramente é necessário saber que,
em Inglês, os adjetivos são invariáveis: she is beautiful (ela é bonita), he is beautiful (ele é bonito),
they are beautiful (elas são bonitas, eles são bonitos). Logo, o adjetivo beautiful signifca bonita,
bonito, bonitas ou bonitos. Ao mesmo tempo, também se torna necessário conhecer os graus
comparativo e superlativo dos ditos adjetivos. Para esta questão em particular, apenas o grau
comparativo seria suficiente. Analisemos cada uma das alíneas. (a) Bom, boa, bons, boas – bem.
(b) Melhor (do que) – pior (do que). (c) Pior (do que) – bem. (d) Gooder não existe em Inglês –
melhor (do que). (e) Bem – boa, bom, boas, bons.
06. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentence below:
What time _______?
Sorry. I don‟t know _______.
A que horas sai/parte o ônibus?
Desculpe. Eu não sei quando é.
(A) do the bus leaves – when is it.
(B) does the bus leaves – when it is.
(C) did the bus left – when it was.

124 2012/2013 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 (D) did the bus leave – when did it. ON – em cima/sobre o espaço ou o tempo.
(E) does the bus leave – when it is. TO – indica destino, finalidade, meta ou objetivo (para).
FOR – indica causa, motivo ou razão (por, pelo, pela, pelos, pelas)
Nesta questão é essencial conhecer um dos pilares básicos da língua Inglesa: saber como fazer
orações afirmativas, negativas, interrogativas afirmativas e interrogativas negativas. REGRA: todos Na questão 07, temos que saber que todos os meios de transporte para os quais temos que subir
os verbos regulares e irregulares precisam de verbo auxiliar (to do) para formar negativas e (ônibus, trem, bicicleta, bonde, avião e cavalo, entre outros) utilizam a preposição ON. Já se
interrogativas, exceto o verbo ser/estar (to be). Peguemos, a título de exemplo, na frase “você é estivermos no carro, dizemos IN the car. Para traduzirmos a expressão “no primeiro piso/andar”
brasileiro”. Afirmativa: you are Brazilian. Negativa: you are not Brazilan. Interrogativa afirmtiva: are sempre teremos que utilizar a preposição ON. Logo, a alínea A é a única que responde
you Brazilian? Interrogativa negativa: are you not Brazilian? Olhemos, agora, para a frase “eles corretamente a esta questão.
moram no Brasil”. Afirmativa: they live in Brazil. Negativa: they don‟t live in Brazil. Interrogativa
afirmativa: do they live in Brazil? Interrogativa negativa: don‟t they live in Brazil? Outro exemplo: 2011/2012
“ela trabalha nos EUA”. Afirmativa: she works in the USA. Negativa: she doesn‟t work in the USA?
Interrogativa afirmativa: does she work in the USA? Interrogativa negativa: doesn‟t she work in the
31. Choose the option that correctly completes the sentence:
USA? Passemos a analisar a questão 29. O ônibus sai/parte às 10 da manhã: the bus (it) leaves at
10:00 a.m. (afirmativa); the bus doesn‟t leave at 10:00 a.m. (negativa); what time does the bus
As they _________ down the street they _________ Amelia.
leave?
(interrogativa afirmativa). Eu não sei quando é (a que horas parte/sai o ônibus): I don‟t know when (A) walked – saw
it is. Já se perguntassemos “quando é?”: when is it? Logo, a única alínea correta é a E. (B) were walking – saw
(C) walked – were seeing
(D) was walking – was seeing
07. Choose the alternative that correctly completes all examples below:
(E) were walking – were seeing
_______ a bus; _______ the first floor; _______ a ship.
32. Choose the alternative that correctly shows the comparative form of the adjectives below:
Em um ônibus; no primeiro andar; em uma embarcação (navio ou nave espacial)
Good – bad – ill – far – old
(A) on
(B) in (A) best – worse – worst – further – elder
(C) at (B) best – worst – worse – farthest – eldest
(C) better – worse – worse – further – elder
(D) to
(D) better – the worst – worse – the farther – older
(E) for (E) The best – the worst – the worse – farther – older.

As preposições são, normalmente, a matéria na qual os alunos apresentam mais dificuldades, uma 33. Choose the correct alternative:
vez que as regras aplicadas para a sua utilização na língua Inglesa sempre têm exceções. De forma
geral, podemos definir cada uma das cinco preposições assim: (A) I like not the test.
(B) Do not be impolite.
AT – faz referência a espaço ou tempo determinados/específicos. (C) It is important to do not do it.
IN – dentro do espaço ou do tempo. (D) You do not must worry about that.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2011/2012 125

 (E) Remind her to not to go there again. House is successful for two reasons: first because it has a great author and composer, and second
because your imagination takes over from your sensible mind.

34. Choose the option that correctly completes the sentences:

36. Decide if the following statements are True or False according to the text and choose the
Open the books ___ page 20. There is a mistake ___ line 10. Next week, ___ September 15th, ___ correct alternative.
the morning, there will be a test.
I. The story takes place in a haunted castle.
(A) on – on – at – on II. Henry James and Benjamin Britten worked together in The Turn of the Screw.
(B) at – in – on – in III. The story first appeared in a book.
(C) to – at – on – in
(D) in – to – at – on
(E) to – in – on – in (A) F–F–T
(B) T–T–F
(C) T–F–T
35. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below. (D) F–T–F
(E) T–T–T
The children ______________ play outside today because of the rain.
As a result, they _________________ stay home and watch TV. If it doesn‟t rain tomorrow, they
37. How are ghost stories and music similar?
_________________ be able to ride their bikes in the street.

(A) Both of them are scary.

(A) must – can‟t – will
(B) Both of them make us cry.
(B) will – must – should
(C) Both of them are part of an opera.
(C) won‟t – can‟t – must
(D) Both of them are written by the same person.
(D) can‟t – should – will
(E) Both of them appeal to our feelings and emotions
(E) won‟t – can‟t – should

38. Which alternative best completes the sentence below? (* means noarticle)
Answer questions 36 and 37 according to the text below.
Henry James is one of America‟s greatest novelists, and the author of The Turn of the Screw, a _______ good book is ________ best medicine for ________ loneliness.
well-known short ghost story, published in 1898. It is a story that many people have made into
films and operas. One of the best operas is one written by Benjamin Britten in the mid twentieth (A) - the – a
century. The book is about a governess who looks after two children in a house which has no near (B) The - a - *
neighbours. The story is both haunting and frightening. The children, Flora and Miles, are charming (C) A - the - *
to their teacher, but when she starts to see the figures of a man and woman in the gardens, she (D) The – * – a
begins to believe that supernatural forces possess them, and will lead to their destruction. The (E) - the – the
reader and the listener sometimes wonder if the governess is mad, because both author and
composer cleverly leave a lot of room for the reader‟s / listeners‟ own terrible thoughts and ideas.
39. Write “T” if the sentence is grammatically correct, and “F” if it is grammatically incorrect. Then
Ghost stories and music have a similar effect on us. The best ghost stories try to get into our
choose the alternative with the correct sequence.
minds, and music has the power to go past our conscious thought and appeal directly to our
feelings and emotions. So the terrifying production that opened last night at Covent Garden Opera
1. ( ) Many people are dying in Haiti.

126 2011/2012 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

2. ( ) Much of the children are sick and hungry. Apesar de não apresentar WHEN na sentença, ao lê-la é possível perceber que estava ocorrendo
3. ( ) There are only a few food to eat. uma ação contínua completa no passado enquanto outra ação, mais curta, também completa no
passado, ocorreu.
4. ( ) Not much fresh water is left.
5. ( ) They need lot money to rebuild the country.
32. ALTERNATIVA (C)
(A) T–F–F–T–F
(B) T–T–F–F–T a) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos
(C) T–T–F–T–F na forma irregular. BEST e WORST não são formas comparativas e sim formas
(D) F–F–F–F–T superlativas irregulares de GOOD e BAD/ILL.
(E) F–T–T–F–T b) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos
na forma irregular. BEST, WORST, FARTHEST e ELDEST não são formas comparativas e
sim formas superlativas irregulares de GOOD , BAD/ILL, FAR e OLD. Observe também
40. Complete the text with the missing words, then choose the correct alternative.
que no caso de FAR, podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further para formas corretas.
c) CORRETA. Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus
________ best friend´s name is Kathy. ________ is ____________ the
comparativos e superlativos na forma irregular. Observe também que no caso
United States. _________ husband Jack lives with _________ in a
de FAR, podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further para formas corretas.
beautiful house _________ Berkeley, California. Kathy comes d) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos
_________Brazil every two years. na forma irregular. THE WORST não é forma comparativa e sim forma superlativa
irregulare de BAD/ILL. Observe também que no caso de FAR, podemos utilizar tanto
a) My – She – in – Your – him – in – to farther quanto further para formas corretas.
b) My – She – from – Her – her – in – to e) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos
c) My – She – in – your – her – at – from na forma irregular. THE BEST, THE WORST não são formas comparativas e sim formas
d) Your – She – in – His – her – in – from superlativas irregulares de GOOD , BAD/ILL. Observe também que no caso de FAR,
e) Your – He – from – Your – her – at – from podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further para formas corretas.

33. ALTERNATIVA (B)

GABARITO COMENTADO
31. ALTERNATIVA (B)
O uso de PAST CONTINUOUS (uma ação longa e continuada que estava ocorrendo no passado e
foi interrompida por uma ação curta, também ocorrida no passado) .
A frase no PAST CONTINUOUS é construída da seguinte forma:
She were going to Rio when she went to São Paulo.
1ª parte 2ª parte
ª to go”. A frase correta seria: “Remind her not to go there again”.
1 parte - noun or pronoun + to be + (main verb +ing)
2ª parte - noun or pronoun + main verb + ED or irregulars‟ list }
a) Em uma frase no presente simples, para se formular a negativa é necessário utilizar o
auxiliar DO. A frase correta ficaria então “I dont‟t like the test.”
b) Correta. “Do not be impolite” é a forma abreviada de “Don‟t be impolite”, que é
uma forma usal de dizer “não seja indelicado”.
c) Formas infinitivas não podem ir para a negativa, logo, não seria possível escrever to do
not do. A frase correta seria: “It is important to do it” ou “It is important not to do it”.
d) Diante de verbos modais não se colocam verbos auxiliares pois o verbo modal já é um
tipo de verbo auxiliar. A frase correta seria: “You must not worry about that”.
e) Formas infinitivas não podem ir para a negativa, logo, não seria possível escrever “to not

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2011/2012 127

34. ALTERNATIVA (B)
a) 1ª LACUNA - ON é utilizado com o sentido de em cima/acima. Quando nos referimos a
designação de local, como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em
algum lugar, não utilizamos ON e sim AT.
2ª LACUNA – Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja,
dentro de outro algo, usamos a preposição IN e não a preposição ON.
3ª LACUNA – Apesar de meses do ano virem precedidos de preposição IN, o mês do ano,
quando seguido de data específica, vem precedido pela preposição ON e não a
preposição IN ou AT.
4ª LACUNA - por se tratar de momento do dia (momentos do dia são precedidos da
preposição IN, com exceção da palavra night) deverá ser preenchida com a preposição
IN.
b) Correta.
c) 1ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se
locomover para chegar em algum lugar. Quando nos referimos a designação de local,
como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em algum lugar, não
utilizamos TO e sim AT.
2ª LACUNA – Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja,
dentro de outro algo, usamos a preposição IN e não a preposição AT.
d) 1ª LACUNA - IN é utilizado com o sentido de “dentro”. Quando nos referimos a
designação de local, como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em
algum lugar, não utilizamos IN e sim AT.
2ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se
locomover para chegar em algum lugar. Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante
de outro algo, ou seja, dentro de outro algo, usamos a preposição IN e não a preposição
TO.
3ª LACUNA – Apesar de meses do ano virem precedidos de preposição IN, o mês do ano,
quando seguido de data específica, vem precedido pela preposição ON e não a
preposição IN ou AT.
4ª LACUNA - por se tratar de momento do dia (momentos do dia são precedidos da
preposição IN, com exceção da palavra night) deverá ser preenchida com a preposição
IN.
e) 1ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se
locomover para chegar em algum lugar. Quando nos referimos a designação de local,
como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em algum lugar, não
utilizamos TO e sim AT.
128 2011/2012 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
Dica de Resolução Rápida:
Lembramos que em questões de preposição o aluno, para agilizar a prova, deve procurar
primeiramente as lacunas que teria certeza de como preencher e de posse dessa informação
eliminar as alternativas incorretas.
No caso da frase em questão, acreditamos ser a lacuna 4 a que apresentará maior facilidade ao
aluno: ____ the morning. Essa lacuna, por se tratar de momento do dia (momentos do dia são
precedidos da preposição IN, com exceção da palavra night) deverá ser preenchida com a
preposição IN, já eliminando as alternativas A e D e tornando desnecessário ao aluno se preocupar
com a lacuna 03, já que todas as alternativas que sobraram apresentam a mesma preposição nesta
lacuna.
Observando as lacunas 1 e 2 verificamos que em ambas temos 2 alternativas iguais e 1 diferente,
logo, podemos optar por escolher qualquer uma das duas pra iniciar nosso trabalho de eliminação.
Pela ordem, optamos pela lacuna 1
1ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se locomover
para chegar em algum lugar. Quando nos referimos a designação de local, como quando damos
orientações a alguém de como chegar em algum lugar, não utilizamos TO e sim AT.
RESULTADO: Analisando apenas as lacunas 4 e 1 é possível chegar na alternativa certa e poupar
tempo ao aluno. Resposta, alternativa B.
Se optássemos pela lacuna 2
2ª LACUNA – Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja, dentro de
outro algo, usamos a preposição IN e não a preposição AT.
RESULTADO: Analisando apenas as lacunas 4 e 2 é possível chegar na alternativa certa e poupar
tempo ao aluno. Resposta, alternativa B.
35. ALTERNATIVA (D)
a) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora. Logo, o uso do modal
“must”referente à obrigatoriedade, na afirmativa, torna a alternativa incorreta.
b) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora. Logo, o uso do modal
“will”referente à futuro passível de ocorrer, na afirmativa, torna a alternativa incorreta.
c) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora, logo... WON‟T é um
modal perfeitamente possível de ser usado nesta situação. Entretanto, apesar das
crianças não poderem sair, nada as impede de ficarem assistindo TV em casa, o que
tornaria o uso do modal CAN‟T (can+not = não poder) incorreto.
d) Correta.
e) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora, logo... WON‟T é um
modal perfeitamente possível de ser usado nesta situação. Entretanto, apesar das
 crianças não poderem sair, nada as impede de ficarem assistindo TV em casa, o que
tornaria o uso do modal CAN‟T (can+not = não poder) incorreto.
Dica de Resolução Rápida:
Verificando apenas a primeira e a segunda lacuna já é possível alcançar a resposta correta, sem
que seja preciso verificar a terceira lacuna. Os segundos da terceira lacuna podem ser preciosos ao
concursando ao final da prova.
36. ALTERNATIVA (A)
a) Correta.
b) I – é FALSA pois o texto informa que a governanta passa a acreditar que a casa está
sendo assombrada e não que a casa realmente é assombrada.
II – é FALSA pois Henry James escreveu o livro, enquanto Benjamin Britten adaptou o
mesmo para uma ópera.
III – é VERDADEIRA. É possível perceber isso lendo o primeiro parágrafo e a primeira
linha do segundo parágrafo.
c) I – é FALSA pois o texto informa que a governanta passa a acreditar que a casa está
sendo assombrada e não que a casa realmente é assombrada.
d) II – é FALSA pois Henry James escreveu o livro, enquanto Benjamin Britten adaptou o
mesmo para uma ópera.
III – é VERDADEIRA. É possível perceber isso lendo o primeiro parágrafo e a primeira
linha do segundo parágrafo.
e) I – é FALSA pois o texto informa que a governanta passa a acreditar que a casa está
sendo assombrada e não que a casa realmente é assombrada.
II – é FALSA pois Henry James escreveu o livro, enquanto Benjamin Britten adaptou o
mesmo para uma ópera.
37. ALTERNATIVA (E)
No último parágrafo do texto, nas primeiras 4 linhas o autor do texto diz exatamente qual
considera ser o fator comum entre as músicas e as histórias de fantasmas. Para ele, é o fato de
ambas apelarem para os sentimentos e emoções das pessoas. Alternativa correta, letra E.
38. ALTERNATIVA (C)
a) Diante do sujeito good book pede um artigo indefinido. Caso o concursando não tenha
notado essa necessidade, poderá perceber o erro dessa alternativa ao colocar um artigo
indefinido diante da palavra loneliness = solidão. Solidão é uma palavra abstrata e, por
isso não leva artigo.
b) Ao se referir a good book, está se referindo a todo e qualquer livro que seja bom, logo
não pode vir precedido de artigo definido (the) e sim artigo indefinido (A). Caso o
concursando não note o erro nesta lacuna, a lacuna seguinte o ajudará a ter certeza que
esta alternativa está errada, ao colocar um artigo indefinido diante de um superlativo
que, por regra, sempre vem precedido de artigo definido.
c) Correta.
d) Ao se referir a good book, está se referindo a todo e qualquer livro que seja bom, logo
não pode vir precedido de artigo definido (the) e sim artigo indefinido (A). Caso o
concursando não note o erro nesta lacuna, a lacuna seguinte o ajudará a ter certeza que
esta alternativa está errada, ao não colocar artigo diante de um superlativo que, por
regra, sempre vem precedido de artigo definido.
e) Diante do sujeito good book pede um artigo indefinido. Caso o concursando não tenha
notado essa necessidade, poderá perceber o erro dessa alternativa ao colocar um artigo
definido diante da palavra loneliness = solidão. Solidão é uma palavra abstrata e, por isso
não leva artigo.
39. ALTERNATIVA (A)
(TRUE) Many people are dying in Haiti.
Poeplo = plural de person. Logo, é uma palavra contável que pode ser precedida do quantifier
many e exige verbo no plural.
(FALSE) Much of the children are sick and rungry.
Children = plural irregular da palavra child. Logo, é uma palavra contável e por isso deve vir
precedida de um quantifier contável e não um quantifier incontável, como é o caso de MUCH.
(FALSE) There are only a few food to eat.
A few = algum/alguma
Few = pouco/pouca
A frase em questão deveria conter FEW e não A FEW, para manter o sentido desejado.
(TRUE) Not much fresh water is left.
Water = água – substantive incontável. Logo, está só pode vir precedido por um quantifier
incontável, como está corretamente empregado o MUCH. Lembramos que, por ser incontável, vem
com verbo no singular.
(FALSE) The need lot money to rebuild the country.
LoT = terreno, lote.
Para dar o sentido de MUITO, utilize-se A LOT ou A LOT OF.
[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2011/2012 129
40. ALTERNATIVA (B) · A new vegetable is broccoflower. It‟s a cross betweens a cauliflower and broccoli. It has
lots of beta carotene. Beta carotene fights certain types of cancers. It also has lost of vitamin C.
a) Até a quarta lacuna seria perfeitamente possível completar como a alternativa apresenta EAT SMART is on Bay City Cable, Channel 3, Tuerday at 10.
se o texto terminasse nela. Os erros iniciam a partir da quinta lacuna, que se desvincula
From: Success – coommunicating in English2.
completamente do resto do texto. Para ter coerência a frase precisaria ser
Michael Walker. Add – Wesley. 1994, p.38.
completamente modificada a partir da palavra “lives” ou que os complementos sejam
modificados de acordo com o que consta na alternativa B.
b) Correta.
c) Até a quarta lacuna seria perfeitamente possível completar como a alternativa apresenta ADVERTISEMENT 2
se o texto terminasse nela. Os erros iniciam a partir da quinta lacuna, que se desvincula
completamente do resto do texto. Para ter coerência a frase precisaria ser Low Fat Cooking Classes
completamente modificada a partir da palavra “lives” (até porque, dizer que o marido da
pessoa com que você está falando vive com sua melhor amiga é algo que definitivamente
Eat a proper diet. You‟ll live longer. You can lower the risk of heart disease, strokes, and cancer.
não condiz com a ideia da questão) ou que os complementos sejam modificados de
Sign up for twelve weeks of low fat cookig. The classes include recipes, an audiotape, handouts,
acordo com o que consta na alternativa B.
and snacks.
d) Até a terceira lacuna seria perfeitamente possível completar como a alternativa apresenta
se o texto terminasse nela. Os erros iniciam a partir da quarta lacuna, quando se utiliza o WHEN: Mondays, 11 a.m.
possessivo HIS diante de HUSBAND, sendo que no texto se torna evidente que o marido Wednesdays, 7 p.m.
é de Kathy – como Kathy é mulher o possessivo correto seria Her. WHERE: Community Center
e) Kathy é mulher e o pronome correto para designar sua condição feminina é SHE e não HE
For more information, call 495-2231
– que se refere a condição de ser humano do sexo masculino.
From: Success – Communicating in English 2.
Michael Walker. Add – Wesley. 1994. p. 38.
2010/2011

Answer questions 31 and 32 according to the texts below: ADVERTISEMENTE 3

COOKERY BOOK
ADVERTISEMENT 1
Read Chinese Vegetable and Vegetarian Cooking and you wil never think of vegetables as dull
FOR A HEALTHY LIFE again. Go on further and try some of the recipes. No special expertise is needed, the methods of
preparation and cooking are explainet step bay step and no previous knowledge of Chinese cooking
EAT SMART is a new show on food and nutrition. Dr. Don Shubert is the host. Last week, Dr. is required.
Shubert talked about foods that fight disease.
Kenneth Lo, well known expert on Chinese food, makes it all so straightforward. The book is
arranged according to method of cooking, so that you can quickly master stir-frying, for example,
· Did you know oranges help fight cataracts? and can try the many recipes which can be made in this way before going on to another method.
Nearly half of all Americans over 75 get cataracts. Cataracts cloud over the lens of the eye and can There are also sections on sauces, soups, rice, pasta, eggs, beancurd, hot and cold salads and
cause blindness. So drink your orange juice, and eat other food rich in vitamin C. sweets.
From: Outlines. Andy Hopkins and Chris Tribble, Longman, 1989. p. 65.

· Eating at least seven cloves of garlic a day can lower your blood pressure!

130 2010/2011 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

31. Choose the correct alternative about the advertisements above: 35. Choose the correct altenative:

a) I like the flowers very much.

a) In advertisement 3, the author teaches the reader how to write a book about Chinese
b) She listens to radio every night.
food.
c) He is a honest person.
b) According to advertisement 2, classes will be given once a week.
d) This car goes as fast as 160 Km na hour.
c) Advertisement 1 presents the tips given by a doctor in a TV show.
e) The Mount Everest is the highest mountain on earth.
d) According to advertisement 1, a lot of American teenagers can‟t see properly because of
cataracts.
e) According to advertisement 2, no recipes will be given during the course. 36. Choose the best alternative to complete the question below:

Which vegetable is _____________: carrots, onions or patatoes?

32. If you read Kenneth Lo‟s cookery book you.

a) Will have a different opinion about vegetables. a) healthier

b) Will have to have previous knowledge of Chinese cooking. b) most healthy
c) Will not be able to cook soup. c) the healthiest
d) Will need a translator to understand the recipes. d) a lot healthy
e) Will become a great Chinese cook. e) little healthy

33. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentence: 37. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below in the right order:

The dog bit ____ tail. I play tennis _____ Sundays ____ the morning. My husband prefers to play _____ night.

a) his a) in – on – in
b) it b) on – in – at
c) it‟s c) at – in – on
d) her d) in – at – at
e) its e) on – at – in

34. Choose the alternative that correctly shows the past tense of the verbs below: 38. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below:

See – lie – throw – put Anna ____ go to school today because she ___ walk. Her mother told her she ____ see a doctor.

a) saw – lied – threw – put. a) will – must – should

b) seen – laid – thrown – putted. b) must – can‟t – will
c) saw – lain - throwed – put. c) can‟t – should – must
d) seen – lied – throwed – putted. d) won‟t – can – must
e) seed – laid – threw – put. e) won‟t – can‟t – should

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2010/2011 131

39. Choose the alternative that shows the correct question for the answer below: b) Não é necessário ter conhecimento prévio sobre culinária Chinesa.
c) Poderá preparar vários tipos de pratos, entre eles, sopa.
Joana likes her school very much. d) Não é dito nada na propaganda que leve a crer que seria necessário um tradutor para
compreender as receitas.
a) Do Joana likes her school? e) Ele garante que as receitas são boas e variadas, mas não que a pessoa se tornará um
b) What does Joana like? bom cozinheiro de comidas Chinesas.
c) How is Joana?
d) How does Joana like her school?
e) Does Joana likes schools? 33. ALTERNATIVA (E)

a) Não pode ser usado por ser referente à pessoas ou animais de estimação. Neste caso o
cachorro não está especificado como animal de estimação e, por isso, se enquadra na
40. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below in the right order: situação de animal e para todos os animais se utiliza o pronome IT, em suas variação
apropriadas.
We don‟t have _______ money, just ____ rais. Let‟s take only ___ milk. b) “It” não é utilizado neste formato para pronomes possessivos. Todos os pronomes
possessivos são escritos como “Its”.
a) many – few – a few c) ‟s deverá vir sempre junto ao sujeito possuidor do objeto.
b) much – a few – some d) Não pode ser usado por ser referente à pessoas ou animais de estimação. Neste caso o
c) a loto of – many – few cachorro não está especificado como animal de estimação e, por isso, se enquadra na
d) few – some – many situação de animal e para todos os animais se utiliza o pronome IT, em suas variação
e) many – few – some apropriadas.
e) CORRETA. Adjetivo possessivo concordando com o possuidor do objeto.

GABARITO COMENTADO
34. ALTERNATIVA (D)
31. ALTERNATIVA (D)
a) INCORRETA - “Eu gosto muito de flores”. No caso desta frase, as flores são
a) A propaganda 3 fala sobre um livro que ensina a fazer alguns tipos de comida Chinesa, representantes de um nome amplo por representar toda e qualquer flor, portanto, não
não ensina a escrever um livro sobre o assunto(como diz o item em questão). devem vir precedidas de artigo definido (THE).
b) As aulas são 2 vezes na semana, não 1 vez apenas. b) INCORRETA - Não se utiliza a preposição TO (para) sozinha nesta frase. O correto seria
c) Correta utilizar TO THE radio.
d) A propaganda fala sobre aulas para aprender a se alimentar corretamente e prevenir c) INCORRETA - Nesta frase o artigo indefinido está empregado de forma incorreta. O
algumas possíveis doenças. Em momento algum fala sobre adolescentes e a proporção correto seria utilizar AN, pois o H é de som mudo preponderando o som da vogal seguinte
deles com a cegueira provocada por catarata. O.
e) Receitas serão fornecidas durante o curso e o item em questão dizia o oposto. d) CORRETA - Neste caso a frase está gramatical e semanticamente correta. Em nossa
opinião esta é a resposta completamente correta.
e) CORRETA - Esta frase, em nossa opinião, também está completamente correta, apesar
32. ALTERNATIVA (A) de haver a repetição da palavra THE (cacofonia), fato que não invalida a sua correção
gramatical e semântica.
a) CORRETA. A propaganda diz que as pessoas nunca irão pensar novamente que legumes e
vegetais são “monótonos”, logo, terão uma visão diferentes da que tinham antes.

132 2010/2011 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 PRESENTE PASSADO PARTICÍPIO PASSADO e) Para períodos do dia sempre se utiliza preposição IN; menos no caso de night, onde se
SEE SAW SEEN utiliza a preposição AT.
LIE LIED LIED
THROW THREW THROWN 38. ALTERNATIVA (E)
PUT PUT PUT
a) Não faz sentido dizer que ela irá ( Will GO) para a escola porque ela tem que (MUST)
35. ALTERNATIVA (D) e (E) caminhar.
b) Não faz sentido dizer que ela tem que (MUST) ir para a escola porque ela não pode
a) INCORRETA - “Eu gosto muito de flores”. No caso desta frase, as flores são (CAN‟T) caminhar.
representantes de um nome amplo por representar toda e qualquer flor, portanto, não c) Não faz sentido dizer que ela não pode (CAN‟T) ir para a escola porque ela deveria
devem vir precedidas de artigo definido (THE). (SHOULD) caminhar.
b) INCORRETA - Não se utiliza a preposição TO (para) sozinha nesta frase. O correto seria d) Não faz sentido dizer que ela não irá (WON‟T) para a escola porque ela pode (CAN)
utilizar TO THE radio. caminhar.
c) INCORRETA - Nesta frase o artigo indefinido está empregado de forma incorreta. O e) Correta.
correto seria utilizar AN, pois o H é de som mudo preponderando o som da vogal seguinte
O. 39. ALTERNATIVA (D)
d) CORRETA - Neste caso a frase está gramatical e semanticamente correta. Em nossa
opinião esta é a resposta completamente correta. Tradução da Frase do Enuncidado: Joana gosta muito da escola dela.
e) CORRETA - Esta frase, em nossa opinião, também está completamente correta, apesar a) Não se pode usar Do para Joana. Joana = SHE = terceira pessoa do singular. Na
de haver a repetição da palavra THE (cacofonia), fato que não invalida a sua correção conjugação do verbo TO DO temos SHE DOES.
gramatical e semântica. b) Significa: Do que a Joana gosta?. Não condiz com a resposta em questão.
c) Significa: "Como vai Joana?". A pergunta não condiz com a resposta em questão.
36. ALTERNATIVA (C) d) Significa: "Quanto Joana gosta de sua escola?". A pergunta condiz com a
resposta em questão.
a) Comparativos de superioridade, não utilizado neste caso. e) Com o auxiliar DOES o verbo principal permanece em sua forma base, que é o mesmo
b) Em adjetivos com até duas sílabas não se utiliza as palavras MOST, LEAST, MORE ou que a forma infinitiva sem o TO, logo, o verbo LIKES não poderia estar sendo conjugado,
LESS. logo, não estaria vindo com este S no final.
c) CORRETA. Superlativo que evidencia a necessidade de escolher O MAIS SAUDÁVEL de
todos. 40. ALTERNATIVA (D)
d) “Muita saúde” não se encaixa na frase.
e) “Pouca saúde” não se encaixa na frase. a) MANY é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Money” é incontável.
b) Correta.
37. ALTERNATIVA (B) c) A FEW é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Milk” é incontável.
d) FEW é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Money” é incontável.
a) Para dias da semana sempre se utiliza preposição ON e) MANY é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Money” é incontável.
b) Correta
c) Para dias da semana sempre se utiliza preposição ON
d) Para dias da semana sempre se utiliza preposição ON

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2010/2011 133

 2009/2010 33. Choose the answer that appropriately completes the sentence:

“Maria wants to talk to me but I don‟t want to talk to ____.”

Answer questions 31and 32 according to the text below.

a) she
TEXT I b) he
c) her
d) hers
AMERICAN INDIANS
e) him

The ancestors of today‟s Indians once had the whole of North America for their hunting grounds.
34. Which alternative best completes the dialogue below:
They were descendants of migrants who crossed over from Asia at least before the last ice age
ended, about eleven thousand years ago. A land bridge probably existed where Bering Strait is
A. ________ do you do?
now. The Indians who stayed north of Mexico roamed the continent‟s green forests and swift rivers
B. I am a student.
at will. Then came the white man. Slowly, irrevocably, the Indian was driven from his land. Long,
painful years of adjustment followed, during which attempts were made to pay the Indian for his A. ______ do you go to school?
losses, and some Indians tried to fit into the white man‟s society. B. I am studying law _____ UFRJ.
Both the American and Canadian governments set aside for the Indians tracts of land called A. ______ do you like it?
reservation or reserves. There the Indians could pursue their traditional pattern of living without B. I like it very much, it is a great course.
interference. At the same time the governments provided the reservations with roads, schools,
doctors, hospital service, often farming advisers and social workers. Funds were also available to a) What – Where – at – How
help some Indians obtain a college education. b) How – When – in – What
(Lands and Peoples –the world in color, New York: Grolier Incorporated, 1970, vol 6, p.17) c) When – Where – on – Which
d) What – When – in – What
e) How – What – at – When
31. According to the text, the Indians:

a) were migrants. 35. What is the superlative form of the following adjectives “hot – young – bad – easy”?
b) pursued the white man.
c) crossed over from Asia. a) The hottest – the more young – the worse – the more easy
d) drove to Mexico to escape. b) The hottest – the youngest – the worst – the easiest
e) were paid for their losses. c) The more hot – the youngest – the worst – the easiest
d) The more hot – the more young – the worst – the more easy
e) The hottest – the youngest – the worse – the easiest
32. On line 15, the word “pursue” means:

a) to convince someone of something. 36. Choose the best alternative to complete the question below:
b) to continue doing something.
c) to promise. There _________ seventeen different types of penguins. They can be _________ forty centimeters
d) to ask. to more than one meter tall. They all _________ in the south part of the world. In winter, they
e) to chase or follow someone. swim _________ long way to find warm weather.

134 2009/2010 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 39. Write “T” if the sentence is grammatically correct, and “F” if it is grammatically incorrect. Then
a) are – from – live – a choose the alternative with the correct sequence.
b) be – by – lived –the
c) was – between – will live – a 1. ( ) Many animals are disappearing because of the greenhouse effect.
d) were – at – live – an
2. ( ) Most of the animals in the zoo are sick.
e) are – from – lived – an
3. ( ) There are only a little monkeys in the zoo.
37. Choose the alternative that best completes the dialogue below. 4. ( ) Birds need few water to live.
5. ( ) Lions eat a lot of meat.
A. ____________ different types of penguins inhabit
the South Pole? a) T–F–F–T–F
B. I don‟t know. Ten, maybe. b) F–T–T–F–T
A. No, fifteen. And _____________ tall can they grow? c) T–T–F–F–T
d) F–F–F–F–T
B. I have no idea. One meter?
e) T–T–T–T–F
A. That‟s right. ___________ do they leave the South Pole?
B. Probably in winter.
40. Choose the best alternative to complete the question below:
A. Excellent.
B. _________ are you asking me all these questions? Which animal do you like _________, tigers or lions?
A. Because I want to see if you did your homework!
a) most
a) How much – who – When – How b) the most
b) How many – how – Where – Which c) many
c) How much – when – Who – Why d) more
d) How many – who – When – How e) much
e) How many – how – When – Why

GABARITO COMENTADO
38. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately completes the text below :

31. Resposta Correta: E

“My flight to São Paulo ______ at 10 pm. I bought tickets for the theater. I _________ a musical,
and after I _______ with my friends.”
a) Eles não eram migrantes, mas sim descendentes de migrantes.
b) Eles puderam manter o padrão de vida deles e não PERSEGUIR o homem branco.
a) leaves – go to – am going to
c) Eles eram descentes de migrantes que atravessaram a Ásia, mas ELES não o fizeram.
b) is going to leave – am going to – am going to
d) Eles não procuraram escapar para o México, eles viviam AO NORTE do México.
c) will leave – am going to – am having
e) Correta.
d) is leaving – will watch – will have
e) leaves – am going to – am having.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2009/2010 135

32. Resposta Correta: B e) HOW do you do? = “Como vai você?” / Não poderia ser respondido com “I‟m a
STUDENT.” = “Eu sou estudante”.
Tradução da Frase da linha 11: Lá os índios poderiam seguir com o seu padrão de vida tradicional,
sem interferências.
35. Resposta Correta: B
a) “convencer alguém de alguma coisa”. Eles não tentaram convencer ninguém, apenas
seguir com seu próprio padrão de vida em área reservada especificamente para eles. a) Palavras com até 2 sílabas, como YOUNG e EASY, FORMAM seus superlativos com o
b) CORRETA. “continuar a fazer ALGO” = “seguir com” acréscimo de artigo definido (THE) antes delas e A TERMINAÇÃO ”EST” ao final da
c) “prometer”. Eles não prometeram nada. palavra. Logo, o superlativo dessas palavras seria: THE YOUNGEST e THE EASIEST. (veja
d) “perguntar”. Eles não perguntaram nada. que no caso de EASY, por ser terminada em Y o Y dá lugar ao I antes de se acrescentar
e) “perseguir ou seguir alguém”. Eles não fizeram isso (embora o verbo TO PURSUE também EST ao final).
tenha esse significado) b) CORRETA.
c) Palavras com até 2 sílabas possuem seus superlativos feitos com o acréscimo de artigo
definido diante delas e EST ao final da palavra. Quando estas palavras VÊM no esquema
33. Resposta Correta: C de 3 letras C+V+C, a terceira letra é dobrada. Logo, na palavra HOT, teremos THE
HOTTEST.
Na frase “Maria wants to talk to me but I don‟t want to talk to ____” é preciso que a lacuna d) Palavras com até 2 sílabas possuem seus superlativos feitos com o acréscimo de artigo
em branco seja preenchida pelo pronome OBJETO feminino HER – já que é referente à Maria – definido diante delas e EST ao final da palavra. Logo, teremos para a palavra EASY o
pronome OBJETO que, POR DEFINIÇÃO, sofre ação. superlativo THE EASIEST. (veja que no caso de EASY, por ser terminada em Y o Y dá
lugar ao I antes de se acrescentar EST ao final).
a) SHE = subject pronoun. PRATICA a ação, não sofre a ação.
Quando estas palavras vem no esquema de 3 letras C+V+C, a terceira letra é dobrada.
b) HE = subject pronoun
Logo, na palavra HOT, teremos THE HOTTEST.
No caso do HE temos dois erros:
OBS.: A regra CVC não se aplica a BAD, pois ESTA tem superlativos e comparativos
1 – É um pronome masculino e a lacuna é referente à Maria, que exige pronome
irregulares.
feminino.
e) WORSE é comparativo irregular de BAD. THE WORST é o superlativo correto para BAD.
2 – É um subject pronoun e por isso PRATICA a ação, não sofre a ação.
c) HER = object pronoun. Pronome feminino que sofre a ação.
d) HERS = possessive pronoun. Na fase não se trata de um caso de posse.
36. Resposta Correta: A
e) HIM = object pronoun. Apesar de ser um tipo de pronome que sofre a ação, a lacuna é
referente à Maria, que exige pronome feminino
a) Correta.
b) THERE, neste caso, REFERE-SE AOS VERBOS HAVER/EXISTIR E, portanto, deve ser
ACRESCIDO com uma forma do verbo TO BE designativa de presente, passado ou futuro,
34. Resposta Correta: A
de acordo com o sentido da frase. A forma base seria, então, inapropriada.
c) “seventeen different types of penguins” = “17 tipos deferentes de pinguins” é plural. Logo
a) Correta.
não se pode usar o verbo to be, mesmo que no passado, no singular (WAS).
b) HOW do you do? = “Como vai você?” / Não poderia ser respondido com “I‟m a
d) Logo é possível notar a incoerência produzida pela combinação de tempos verbais da
STUDENT.” = “Eu sou estudante”.
primeira sentença – passado – com a segunda – modal designativo de possibilidade de
c) WHEN do you do? = “Quando você faz?” / Além de estar GRAMATICALMENTE
futuro.
incompleta, não poderia ser respondido com “I‟m a STUDENT.” = “Eu sou estudante”.
Caso o aluno não consiga perceber esta incoerência, pode-se continuar com o erro na
d) WHEN do you go to school? = “Quando você vai para a escola?” / Não poderia ser
escolha da preposição AT. Na frase “They can be _________ forty centimeters to more
respondido com “I am studying Law at UFRJ.” = “Eu estou esdudando Direito na UFRJ.

136 2009/2010 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 than one meter tall.” o autor do texto quer mostrar desde qual altura – altura mínima - o
pinguím poderia até a altura máxima já encontrada e a preposição AT não se enquadra a
este tipo de comparação.
e) Logo é possível notar a incoerência produzida pela combinação de tempos verbais da
primeira sentença – presente –, com a segunda – modal designativo de possibilidade de
futuro – e a terceira – passado.
Caso o aluno não consiga perceber esta incoerência, pode-se continuar com o erro na
escolha do artigo AN. Anteriormente à palavra LONG, por se iniciar com som de
consoante, não se utiliza o artigo indefinido AN e sim o artigo indefinido A.
A alternativa diz que as frases “Many animals are disappearing because of the greenhouse
effect.” e “Most of the animals in the zoo are sick.” estão gramaticalmente incorretas.
Entretanto, não há nenhum erro nestas frases.
e) 3 Alternativas incorretas: T – T – T – T – F
A alternative diz que as frases “There are only a little monkeys in the zoo.” e “Birds need
few water to live” estão corretas. Entretanto, A LITTLE é usado para coisas INCONTÁVEIS
e macaco é contável; enquanto FEW é usado para coisas contáveis e WATER é
incontável. Todas as outras frases da questão estão gramaticalmente corretas.
40. Resposta Correta: D

37. Resposta Correta: E “Which animal do you like _________, tigers or lions?” = “De qual animal você gosta mais, tigres
ou leões?” É uma pergunta comparativa. A pessoa está querendo que seja comparado o gostar de
a) “types of penguins” = tipos de pinguins. Tipos de pingüins é contável e HOW MUCH é tigre (qualquer tigre) com o gostar de leão (qualquer leão).
referente à coisas incontáveis.
b) A pergunta “WHERE do they leave the South Pole?” = “Aonde eles deixam o Pólo Sul?”, a) Most = forma incorreta de superlativo. A forma correta de superlativo seria THE MOST,
além de não fazer sentido, jamais poderia ter como resposta “Probably in winter.” = entretanto, a pergunta em questão é comparativa.
“Provavelmente no inverno”. “No inverno”= período de tempo = WHEN. b) The most = superlativo. A pergunta é comparativa.
c) “types of penguins” = tipos de pinguins. Tipos de pingüins é contável e HOW MUCH é c) Many = determiner. Não se aplica por falta de sentido.
referente à coisas incontáveis. d) Correta.
d) WHO = quem. WHO tall não existe como pergunta. O correto seria HOW tall = “o quão e) Much = determiner. Não se aplica por falta de sentido.
alto”.
e) CORRETA. 2008/2009

38. Resposta Correta: ANULADA

Answer questions 41 and 42 according to the text below.

“(…) and after I _______ with my friends.”

Nenhuma das opções completaria de forma gramaticalmente correta tal lacuna. THANKSGIVING

39. Resposta Correta: C

a) 3 Alternativas incorretas. T – F – F – T – F
A alternativa diz que a frase “Most of the animals in the zoo are sick.” está
gramaticalmente incorreta. Entretanto, não há nenhum erro nesta frase. A frase “Birds
need few water to live” está incorreta, pois FEW é usado para coisas contáveis e WATER
é incontável. E a última frase está gramaticalmente correta.
b) 2 Alternativas incorretas: F – T – T – F – T
A alternativa diz que a frase “Many animals are disappearing because of the greenhouse
effect.” está gramaticalmente incorreta. Entretanto, não há nenhum erro nesta frase. A
alternative diz que as frases “There are only a little monkeys in the zoo.” Está correta,
mas A LITTLE é usado para coisas INCONTÁVEIS e macaco é contável.
c) CORRETA.
d) 2 Alternativas incorretas: F – F – F – F – T
In 1620 one of the first British settlements in America was established in Massachusetts. These
settlers, known as Pilgrims, had come to America to freely practise their religion. They arrived in
November, when it was too late to plant crops. Although many people died, the Pilgrim settlement
survived the winter because of help from Indians who lived nearby. The Indians taught the Pilgrims
about corn and showed them where to fish. The next November, after the crops were harvested,
the Pilgrims gave thanks to God at a feast to which they invited the Indians.
Every year, Americans celebrate Thanksgiving. Families and friends get together for a big feast.
The meal usually includes roast turkey with stuffing and gravy, a sweet sauce made from
cranberries, sweet potatoes, and pumpkin pie. What a meal! It‟s not surprising that a recent
Thanksgiving tradition is to sit after dinner in front of the TV watching a professional football game.
(FALK, R. Spotlight on the USA. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993, p. 14.)

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2008/2009 137

41. According to the text, the Pilgrims: and celebrate it with us.
B: That‟s a great idea! I _________ talk to Bob and see
a) learned how to plant with the Indians.
what he thinks.
b) watched TV after dinner.
c) reached America at the right time to grow crops.
a) do you do – can – should – can
d) and the Indians had a great feast after the first crop was harvested.
b) are you doing – should – will – can
e) and their religion were of great importance to the Indians since they had no God.
c) do you do – are to – can – will
42. What does the pronoun WHICH refer to in the following sentence? d) are you doing – should – can – will
e) are you doing – will – should – will
“…the Pilgrims gave thanks to God at a feast to which they invited the Indians.” (lines 9-10)

a) the Pilgrims. 45. Which alternative best completes the paragraph below? (* means no article).
b) a feast.
c) the Indians. _____Americans celebrate ______Thanksgiving with ______ big feast. They eat _____turkey and
d) God. pumpkin pie.
e) the crops.
a) *–a–*
b) The – * – a – a
43. Choose the alternative that best completes the note below. c) the – * – a
d) The – a – a – the
Dear Mrs. Jones, e) * – the – the
Please_______my daughter Jennifer for missing school yesterday.
We_______to take the Sunday paper off the porch and when we 46. Which alternative best completes the dialogue below?
________it on Monday we ________it was Sunday.
A: _________did the Pilgrims arrive in America?
Your B: In 1620.
Laura Grey
A: And ________ did they get there?
a) excused – forget – find – think
B: In a big ship called the Mayflower.
b) excuse – forgot – found – thought
c) will excuse – forgetting – finding – thinking A: _________ did they first settle in?
d) will excuse – will forget – will find – will think B: In Massachusetts.
e) excuse – will forget – will find – thought A: __________ helped them?
B: The Indians.
44. Which alternative best completes the dialogue below?
a) When – when – What – Who
A: What ____________ for Christmas? b) Who – how – When – What
B: We are not sure yet. Bob thinks we __________ visit c) When – how – Where – Who
his parents but I‟d rather spend the holiday at home. d) What – who – Where – How
e) How – when – Who – Where
A: If you stay here, you _________ come to our house

138 2008/2009 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

47. Which alternative completes this sentence? c) shouldn‟t – can‟t – can
d) doesn‟t have to – must – can‟t
Which holiday do you enjoy ___________: Christmas, Thanksgiving or Halloween? e) couldn‟t – must – doesn‟t have to

a) most
b) the most GABARITO COMENTADO
c) much
d) the more 41. Resposta: Letra D
e) more
a) Incorreta – Os índios não ensinaram os peregrinos a plantar, ensinaram sobre milho e a
48. Which alternative best completes the sentence below? pescar.
b) Incorreta – Quem assiste TV após o jantar são as pessoas da atualidade, como forma de
__________ of the new toys cost so ___________ money that only __________ people can afford tradição após o jantar de Ação de Graças.
them. c) Incorreta – Eles chegaram em Novembro, quando já era muito tarde para o plantio.
d) Correta
a) Much – a few – many e) Nada se fala sobre a troca cultural religiosa entre Índios e Peregrinos no texto
b) Some – much – a few
c) Some – many – a few 42. Resposta: Letra B
d) Much – some – some
e) Many – much – a few “… os Peregrinos agradeceram a Deus em um banquete no qual convidaram os Índios.”
De acordo com a compreensão do texto, torna-se evidente que o “no qual” é referente ao
49. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below. banquete. Logo, a palavra correspondente ao banquete é a alternativa correta.

Yesterday I _________ to my daughter‟s dance recital. I had never been to a dance recital before.
Banquete = feast = Alternativa B
I _________ dancing lessons when I _________ a child.

a) went – haven‟t taken – was 43. Resposta: Letra B

b) have gone – didn‟t take – have been
c) went – didn‟t take – have been a) Incorreta – O bilhete é um pedido de desculpas , logo, a palavra excuse (=
d) have been – have never been – was desculpa/desculpe) não poder vir no passado “excused”, pois significaria “desculpado”.
e) went – didn‟t take – was b) Correta
c) Incorreta - O bilhete é um pedido de desculpas. Complete a frase com will excuse daria o
sentido de ordem/obrigação. Desviando assim o objetivo do bilhete.
50. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below.
d) Incorreta - O bilhete é um pedido de desculpas. Complete a frase com will excuse daria o
sentido de ordem/obrigação. Desviando assim o objetivo do bilhete.
Joan speaks Russian, so she _________ rely on an interpreter when she is there. However, when
e) Incorreta – A segunda frase do pedido de desculpas é um relato do que ocorreu para que
she‟s in Japan, she _________ contract an interpreter because she _________ speak Japanese.
a filha perdesse a aula naquele dia. Logo, fala de algo que ocorreu no passado,
impossibilitando que os verbos sejam utilizados no futuro.
a) can‟t – has to – couldn‟t
b) must not – can – has to

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2008/2009 139

44. Resposta: Letra D 46. Resposta: Letra C

a) Incorreta. Para que a resposta seja feita com o verbo TO BE, como é o caso da resposta
dada pela pessoa B, a pergunta deve conter o verbo TO BE. Além disto, esta pergunta
refere-se a um conceito de ação futura, o que impossibilitaria o emprego do verbo TO DO
no presente.
b) Incorreta – “are you doing – sould” estão corretas, entretanto o will não se emprega
nessa situação. A está fazendo um convite à B, logo, se utilizarmos WILL parecerá que B
é obrigado a fazer algo. O ideal seria a utilização de CAN.
c) Incorreta. Para que a resposta seja feita com o verbo TO BE, como é o caso da resposta
dada pela pessoa B, a pergunta deve conter o verbo TO BE. Além disto, esta pergunta
refere-se a um conceito de ação futura, o que impossibilitaria o emprego do verbo TO DO
no presente
d) Correta
e) Incorreta – “are you doing” está correta, entretanto o will não se emprega nessa
situação. B está comentando sobre uma algo que BOB acredita que deveriam fazer
juntos, mas não necessariamente que farão. Tanto que no início na mesma sentença B
afirma não saber o que será feito. O ideal seria a utilização de SHOULD.
a) Para a resposta “In a big ship called the Mayflower”, a pergunta correta seria HOW e não
WHEN. WHEN = quando ; HOW = como. “Em um grande navio chamado Flor de Maio” é
como ele foi e não quando.
b) Para a resposta “In 1620”, a pergunta correta seria WHEN e não WHO. WHEN = quando ;
WHO = Quem. “Em 1620” é QUANDO eles chegaram na América e não QUEM eles
chegaram na America. Para a resposta “In Massachusetts”, a pergunta correta seria
WHERE e não WHEN. WHEN = quando ; WHERE = aonde. “Em Massachusetts” é ONDE
eles primeiro se acomodaram e não QUANDO eles primeiro se acomodaram.
c) Correta
d) Para a resposta “In 1620”, a pergunta correta seria WHEN e não WHAT. WHEN = quando
; WHO = O que. “Em 1620” é QUANDO eles chegaram na América e não O QUE eles
chegaram na America.
e) Para a resposta “In 1620”, a pergunta correta seria WHEN e não HOW. WHEN = quando ;
HOW = como. “Em 1620” é QUANDO eles chegaram na América e não COMO eles
chegaram na America

47. Resposta: Letra A

45. Resposta: Letra A
Resolução: Esta questão coloca um problema de interpretação:
a) Correta 1) Comparativo: “Which holiday do you enjoy more/better?”
b) Incorreta – não se utilize artigo definido antes de nomes que simbolizem generalizade. 2) Superlativo: “Which holiday do you enjoy most/best?”
Neste caso, AMERICANS está simbolizando o povo americano, mas nenhum americano
Conclusão: A questão é suscetível de ser anulada, visto que tanto a alínea A como a
especificamente.
alínea B estão corretas.
c) Incorreta – não se utiliza artigo diante do nome de feriados comemorativos, como NATAL,
ANO NOVO, etc a) Correta
d) Incorreta – não se utilize artigo definite antes de nomes que simbolizem generalizade. b) Na questão não cabe, porque é exclusivamente utilizada para fazer afirmações (the most
Neste caso, AMERICANS está simbolizando o povo americano, mas nenhum americano beautiful / expensive / etc...)
especificamente. c) Na questão ele está fazendo um tipo comparação, querendo saber qual dos feriados em
e) Incorreto – não se usa artigo definido quando se deseja falar de coisas não específicas. questão é o que a pessoa mão gosta. (???)
No caso do banquete, casa americano faz o seu, logo, deveria ser utilizado artigo d) Em comparações onde se utilizar “more”, não é possível utilizar o artigo definido (THE) na
indefinido. Para se utilizar o artigo definido seria necessário que fosse apenas um único frente.
banquete, específico, para todos os americanos. e) Correta

48. Resposta: Anulada

a) NEW TOYS é contável, logo não é possível se utilizar a palavra MUCH nesta situação.
b) Correta, assim como a alternativa E.

140 2008/2009 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 c) MONEY é uma palavra considerada incontável, logo não seria possível utilizar quantifier 2007/2008
MANY, pois ele é usado apenas com coisas contáveis.
d) NEW TOYS é contável, logo não é possível se utilizar a palavra MUCH nesta situação,
41. Choose the best alternative to complete the following dialogue.
afinal, este quantifier é usado apenas com substantivos incontáveis.
e) Correta, assim como a B.
A: Where are _____ car keys?
B: There are some keys over there.
43. Resposta: Letra E A: Those are not _____. Those are Sara‟s.
B: I thought _____ car was in the garage.
a) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado.
A: That was last week. Ah! Here they are.
HAVEN`T TAKEN é um tempo verbal incorreto, pois o tempo verbal é presente.
b) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVE a) your – hers – my.
GONE é um tempo verbal incorreto, pois o tempo verbal é presente. b) her – yours – yours.
c) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVE c) my – mine – her.
BEEN é um tempo verbal incorreto, pois o tempo verbal é presente. d) my – hers – your.
d) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVE e) her – mine – your.
BEEN é um tempo verbal incorreto, pois o tempo verbal é presente.
e) Correta
42. Choose the alternative that best completes the sentence below.

50. Resposta: Letra D When Mr Wong _____, the police _____ out that he _____ a fortune under his bed.

a) CAN`T é um modal referente a permissão (poder/não poder). Por estar na negativa, a) died – found – was hiding.
informa que Joan NÃO PODE “contar com um intérprete” quando está na Rússia pois ele b) was dying – was fiding – was hiding.
já fala Russo. Entretanto, essa proibição é incorreta já o fato dele falar Russo não o c) dead – find – hide.
proíbe de ter um intérprete. d) died – finds – hides.
b) MUST NOT é um modal referente a necessidade/ obrigação (dever/não dever). Por estar
e) dead – found – hides.
na negativa, informa que Joan NÃO DEVE “contar com um intérprete” quando está na
Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Entretanto, essa proibição é incorreta já o fato dele falar
Russo não o impossibilita de ter um intérprete caso ele assim o queira. 43. Which group of verbs complete the dialogue below appropriately?
c) SOULDN`T é um modal referente a recomendação (deveria/não deveria). Por estar na
negativa, informa que Joan NÃO DEVERIA “contar com um intérprete” quando está na
Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Apesar desta frase fazer sentido, sua continuação torna a DOCTOR – How are you today?
alternativa completamente incorreta. Veja: PATIENT – Bad. My back hurts.
Na sequencia ele informa que Joan NÃO PODE (can`t) contratar um intérprete pois ele DOCTOR – _____ you bend over and touch your knee?
PODE (can) falar Japonês. Entretanto, essa proibição é incorreta já o fato dele falar
PATIENT – I _____ but it hurts a lot.
japonês não o proíbe de ter um intérprete desta língua.
DOCTOR – Well, you _____ take some aspirin and lie
d) Correta.
e) MUST NOT é um modal referente a necessidade/ obrigação (dever/não dever). Por estar down. Oh, and you _____ lift any weight.
na negativa, informa que Joan NÃO DEVE “contar com um intérprete” quando está na PATIENT – OK. Thanks.
Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Entretanto, essa proibição é incorreta já o fato dele falar
Russo não o impossibilita de ter um intérprete caso ele assim o queira.
a) Must – mustn‟t – have to – don‟t have to.
b) Can – can – should – shouldn‟t.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2007/2008 141

 c) Should – shouldn‟t – can – can‟t. a) many – many.
d) Will – won‟t – could – couldn‟t. b) few – few.
e) Could – couldn‟t – must – mustn‟t. c) many – a little.
d) much – a few.
e) many – few.
44. Choose the sentence in which the adverbs are in the standard position.

a) At the concert Sunday last beautifully they played. 48. All the sentences below are correct, except:
b) Beautifully they played at the concert last Sunday.
c) Last Sunday at the concert they beautifully played. a) The police were here yesterday.
d) They played beautifully at the concert last Sunday. b) I‟m afraid the news are not good.
e) They played last Sunday at the concert beautifully. c) There are a lot of sheep in the barn.
d) Could you give me some informations?
e) There are many furnitures in the room.
45. Choose the sentence in which the preposition on can be appropriately used.

a) Wait for me _____ the intersection, will you? Answer questions 49 and 50 according to the text below.
b) Joseph went _____ the farm yesterday.
c) You can buy batteries _____ the corner store.
WHAT‟S IN A NAME
d) It was crowded _____ the cafeteria today.
e) There‟s a good show _____ TV tonight.
People from cultures around the globe have always believed names have magical powers, and that
just by giving a certain name, you can instill positive qualities in your baby. It is such “magical” or
46. Which answer contains the articles that appropriately complete the sentences below?
even sub-conscious thinking that may have been behind names such as Faith, Hope, and Charity,
which were popular many years ago in the U.S.Astrological names, for example, are chosen
Frank‟s farm is near _____ university. Many of us,
according to the time of birth, in the hopes that such names will be lucky and work with harmony
biology students from _____ university, go to his farm
under the stars. A child born under the sign of Leo might be given a name that means lion – the
to observe _____ animals which live on _____ farm. zodiac symbol of Leo. Oriental astrologers believe there must be a balance of the basic elements –
Last time I went there I had to observe two mammals, earth, fire, metal, water, air and wood – to have a smooth course in life. When a baby‟s horoscope
so I chose to observe _____ horse and _____ ox. is read, if there appears to be too much of one element, metal for example, the baby might be
given a name which means “Earth” to balance the elements in his/her life.Names are chosen for a
a) an – the – the – the – the – an. variety of reasons. Sometimes, names have deep personal meaning for the parents, or they have
b) a – the – a – the – a – the. traditionally been names given to children in their families. Some names have religious significance
c) an – a – a – the – an – an. for the parents, and others are chosen simply because the parents like the sound of the name.
d) a – the – the – the – a – an. Whatever the reason, it is important for parents to remember that, like it or not, others will form
e) an – a – the – the – a – a. opinions about their child according to their name. Research has shown that people are often
stereotyped as successful, plain, popular or otherwise all because of their name.

47. Choose the answer whose items appropriately complete the sentence below.
49. Choose the statement which is supported by the information in the text.
There were _____ people at the flea market yesterday, but very _____ things were sold.
a) A baby named Jupiter will be adventurous and impulsive.

142 2007/2008 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 b) A person‟s image is influenced by his or her name.
c) Parents hire astrologers to choose a name for their baby.
d) Catholics do not care about their babies‟ names.
e) Names can give people magical powers.
50. All the statements below are true, except:
a) Many people believe that a name can influence a baby‟s personality.
b) Oriental astrologers believe that a name can help ba- lance the elements of life.
c) Astrological names are considered unlucky.
d) Parents choose names for several different reasons.
e) Religion may influence parents when they choose a name for their baby.
GABARITO COMENTADO
41.
a) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem
relação com sua afirmação seguinte. Logo, a 1ª lacuna e a 2ª lacuna são referentes à
mesma pessoa – ao proprietário da chave do carro. Partindo dessa compreensão
podemos concluir que se utilizarnos YOUR na primeira lacuna, deveremos
obrigatóriamente utilizar YOURS na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à
mesma pessoa.
b) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem
relação com sua afirmação seguinte. Logo, a 1ª lacuna e a 2ª lacuna são referentes à
mesma pessoa – ao proprietário da chave do carro. Partindo dessa compreensão
podemos concluir que se utilizarnos HER na primeira lacuna, deveremos obrigatóriamente
utilizar HERS na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
c) Correta
d) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem
relação com sua afirmação seguinte. Logo, a 1ª lacuna e a 2ª lacuna são referentes à
mesma pessoa – ao proprietário da chave do carro. Partindo dessa compreensão
podemos concluir que se utilizarnos MY na primeira lacuna, deveremos obrigatóriamente
utilizar MINE na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
e) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem
relação com sua afirmação seguinte. Logo, a 1ª lacuna e a 2ª lacuna são referentes à
mesma pessoa – ao proprietário da chave do carro. Partindo dessa compreensão
podemos concluir que se utilizarnos HER na primeira lacuna, deveremos obrigatóriamente
utilizar HERS na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
42.
a) Correta
b) Finding = conclusão / descoberta. Was finding out é uma expressão que não existe. Find
out = descobrir. Não é possível “estar descobrindo”algo. Ou se descobre ou não se
descobre. Atenção: DYE ≠ DIE; dye = tintura/ tingir ; die = morrer
c) DEAD = subst./adjetivo = morto; DIE = verbo = morrer. Na lacuna em questão deveria
ser utilizado um verbo e não um substantivo ou adjetivo. Vale lembrar que os adjetivos
costumam vir antes do nome que estão adjetivando e a lacuna em questão está a pós o
nome.
d) Se utilizarmos o simples past na primeira lacuna será impossível construir uma frase com
sentido adequado em um contexto colocando os verbos seguintes no presente simples.
Ne ste caso, temos como mais adequado o uso de uma fase no PAST CONTINUOUS que
trata de uma longa ação – estar escondendo uma grande fortuna debaixo da cama - que
foi interrompida por uma ação curta – a morte de Mr Wong.
e) DEAD = subst./adjetivo = morto; DIE = verbo = morrer. Na lacuna em questão deveria
ser utilizado um verbo e não um substantivo ou adjetivo. Vale lembrar que os adjetivos
costumam vir antes do nome que estão adjetivando e a lacuna em questão está a pós o
nome.
43.
a) MUST – modal relativo a obrigatoriedade. Em uma pergunta de consulta médica o mais
condizente seria perguntar se a pessoa “pode” / “consegue” fazer algo e não se ela “tem
que” fazer algo.
b) Correta
c) SHOULD - modal relacionado à sugestão “dever/não dever fazer algo”. Em uma pergunta
de consulta médica o mais condizente seria perguntar se a pessoa “pode” / “consegue”
fazer algo e não se ela “deveria” fazer algo.
d) WILL – designativo de futuro. Em uma pergunta de consulta médica o mais condizente
seria perguntar se a pessoa “pode” / “consegue” fazer algo e não se ela “irá” fazer algo.
e) COULD – forma educada de se solicitar o mesmo que se solicitaria com CAN. Se, ao invés
de optar por completar a primeira lacuna com CAN optasse em completar com COULD,
este poderia ser considerado correto. Entretanto, o complemento da segunda lacuna –
que é a resposta para a pergunta anterior – faz com que esta opção fique incorreta. A
frase “I couldn`t but it hurts a lot” = “Eu não poderia, mas isso dói muito”, simplesmente
não faz sentido.
[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2007/2008 143
44. 46.
a) Beautifully – advérbio de modo. Os advérbios de modo vem após o verbo principal, a) O artigo A é usado, em caráter de exceção, antes palavras iniciadas com as vogais
porém antes de particípios. Nesta frase ele está antes do substantivo e do verbo da frase, U/EW/EU and Wi quando as mesmas possuem som de “iu” .Exemplo: a useful thing; a
o que o torna errado. A posição de LAST na frase também se encontra incorreta. Last ewe; a European.
está adjetivando Sunday, formando, em conjunto com ele, um advérbio de tempo. b) “a animal” – terceria lacuna – é incorreto pois o artigo indefinido é utilizado apenas diante
Advérbios de tempo geralmente vem no final da frase, mas podem vir no início da frase de palavras no singular.
se seguidos de vírgula. Todo o resto da estrutura gramatical também encontra-se em c) artigo A é usado, em caráter de exceção, antes palavras iniciadas com as vogais U/EW/EU
ordem inversa.Tornando a mesma gramaticalmente incorreta em vários níveis, and Wi quando as mesmas possuem som de “iu” .Exemplo: a useful thing; a ewe; a
b) B eautifully – advérbio de modo. Os advérbios de modo vem após o verbo principal, European.
porém antes de particípios. Nesta frase ele está antes do substantivo e do verbo da frase, d) Correta.
o que o torna errado. e) artigo A é usado, em caráter de exceção, antes palavras iniciadas com as vogais U/EW/EU
c) Last Month – advérbio de tempo. Os advérbios de tempo geralmente vem no final da and Wi quando as mesmas possuem som de “iu” .Exemplo: a useful thing; a ewe; a
frase, mas podem vir no início da frase se seguidos de vírgula. Nesta frase a vírgula após European.
o advérbio foi omitida, tornando-a incorreta.
d) Correta.
47.
e) Last Month – advérbio de tempo. Os advérbios de tempo geralmente vem no final da
frase, mas podem vir no início da frase se seguidos de vírgula. Caso venha a ser posto a) very many – não é possível de ser utilizado junto de forma gramaticalmente correta. Very
em qualquer outra posição em uma frase, deve ser posto entre vírgulas para ressaltar pode ser usado apenas com determiners incontáveis.
que aquela não é a sua posição regular em uma frase. Nesta frase a vírgula após o b) Few – few não daria o sentido de contrariedade solicitado por BUT.
advérbio foi omitida, tornando-a incorreta. c) Alittle – determiner utilizado para INCONTÁVEIS. THINGS é uma palavra considerada
contável.
d) MUCH – determiner utilizado para INCONTÁVEIS. PEOPLE é uma palavra considerada
45. contável.
A preposição ON é utilizada para: e) Correta.
 Dar sentido de em cima, ou “no/na” (O livro está na mesa. – não é dentro e sim em cima
dela/ nela) 48.
 Antes dos dias da semana
Tanto a palabra INFORMATION quanto a palabra FORNITURE são consideradas palavras
 Lugar ou moradia em uma rua, se o número não estiver mencionado.
incontáves e, por isso, nenhuma das duas poderia ir para o plural. Logo, teríamos duas respostas
a) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. corretas: D e E.
Quando nos referimos a locais onde alguma coisa irá ocorrer, onde um encontro será
marcada ou que é caminho para algum lugar, utilizamos a preposição AT.
b) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. 49.
WENT = passado de GO. Quem vai, vai a algum lugar. GO TO. a) É ditto que os nomes podem ser escolhidos com influências nos astros, mas nada é dito
c) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. sobre qual é a influência do nome Jupiter na vida de uma pessoa.
Quando nos referimos a locais onde alguma coisa irá ocorrer, onde um encontro será b) Correta.
marcada ou que é caminho para algum lugar, utilizamos a preposição AT. c) Alguns buscam os nomes de seus filhos com base nos astros. Mas isso não quer dizer que
d) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. todos os pais contratarão astrólogos para escolher o nome de seus filhos.
Quando nos referimos a locais onde alguma coisa irá ocorrer, onde um encontro será d) Nada é dito sobre católicos se importarem ou não na escolha do nome de seus filhos. É
marcada ou que é caminho para algum lugar, utilizamos a preposição AT. dito, sim, que em alguns casos os nomes são escolhidos por motivos religiosos.
e) Correta.

144 2007/2008 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 e) Os nomes podem influenciar na forma como as pessoas vêem aquela pessoa, mas não b) vale a pena desperdiçar várias horas.
lhes dão poderes mágicos. c) sou capaz de perder horas inteiras.
50. d) posso perder totalmente a noção das horas.
a) Essa crença é a razão dada para as diferentes escolhas feitas pelos país na maior parte e) não me importo em ficar até altas horas.
do texto.
b) Dito nas linhas 11 a 13.
63. What did the writer´s friend find in her inbox?
c) Opção Correta - No texto fala exatamente o oposto do que é dito nesta
sentença.
a) Unimportant messages.
d) As varias razões diferentes são enumeradas durante todo o texto.
b) The writer´s message.
e) Dito nas linhas 19 e 20.
c) An invitation to dinner.
d) No messages at all.
2006/2007 e) Her uncle´s message.

TEXT I 64. According to the passage, the writer´s friend:

Read the text below to answer the items 61, 62, 63 and 64: a) was flown to Panama because the cruise ship had made her feel sick.
b) regretted having chartered a helicopter, after she checked her e-mail in the café.
I used to think I could quit checking my e-mail any time I wanted to, but I stopped kidding c) left the cruise ship on a helicopter sent by her uncle to check her e-mail in the nearest
myself years ago. My e-mail program is up and running 24 hours a day, and once I submit to its Internet café.
siren call, whole hours can go missing. I have a friend who recently found herself stuck on a cruise d) was offered a helicopter to take her to Panama because her cruise ship was stuck.
ship near Panama that didn´t offer e-mail, so she chartered a helicopter to take her to the nearest e) was glad she had left the cruise ship on a helicopter to check her e-mail in the café.
internet café.
There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam, but she thought the trip was
worth it. I know how she felt. You never know when you´re going to get that note from Uncle Eric 65. Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence. _______ you in Miami
about your inheritance. Or that White House dinner invitation with a time-sensitive R.S.V.P. last month?
Time, June 10, 2002.
a) Were.
b) Are.
61. The passage tell us that the writer:
c) Is.
d) Was.
a) believes it´s about time he stopped thinking he can break the e-mail habit any time.
e) Am.
b) is fully aware that he´s a compulsive e-mail checker.
c) used to think only kids wasted whole hours checking their e-mail.
d) didn´t think it would take him years to break the e-mail habit. 66. Which alternative contains the right answer to the following sentences.
e) thinks that once he´s able to stay away from his e-mail for 24 hours, he´ll get rid of his
addiction. 1. There are __________ irrigated areas in the northeastern region of Brasil.
2. There is not __________ water in the refrigerator.

62. Choose the correct translation for “... whole hours can go missing”. (line 4): 3. There is __________ superstition among ancient civilizations.
4. We see __________ people destroying natural resourches today.
a) não sinto falta das horas perdidas.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2006/2007 145

 a) many; much; many; many. 70. Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence.
b) much; many; many; much.
c) many; many; much; much. Your shoes are nice. I like ___________.
d) many; much; much; many.
a) they.
e) many; much; much; much.
b) it.
c) theirs.
67. Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence.
d) their.
e) them.
Romeo is telling Juliet that ________ loves ________.

a) him; hers. 71. Choose the best alternative which completes the sentence:
b) she; her.
c) he; her. This radio is old, but _______ sound is good.
d) she; him.
e) he; she. a) it.
b) their.
c) its.
68. Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence.
d) his.
e) her.
Einstein, __________ theory is very famous, was not American.

a) whom. 72. Which alternative best completes the question?

b) which.
c) whose. Who is _________________ singer in your country?
d) what.
e) who. a) the more famous.
b) the most famous.
c) more famous than.
69. The owl, a bird of prey of the order strigiformes is chieftly nocturnal, __________ a broad head
d) as famous as.
__________ large eyes. There are a lot of owls __________ the Mato Grosso Wetherlands.
e) most famous.

The blanks of this passage can be adequately filled by:

73. Which alternative is the right one to fill in the blank in “Do you have _______ luggage”?
a) and; with; at.
b) with; and; in. a) a.
c) of; and; around. b) an.
d) with; of; near. c) some.
e) and; into; on. d) any.
e) no.

146 2006/2007 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

74. Choose the alternative which contains the correct sentence. 78. Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence.
a) Bob and I am nice friends.
b) My family and John is here Dave and Sue ___________ at the meeting last night.
c) The cat is under the table.
d) Melissa and you am over there. a) was.
e) Bob‟s is a nice boy. b) are.
c) is.
d) be.
75. Which sentence contains the correct use of “a” or “an”?
e) were.

a) Margaret wears an uniform every day.

79. Choose the alternative that completes the following sentences.
b) Peter likes to drink a orange juice.
c) Tom has a new leather coat.
Look at that yacht _______ the water!
d) My teacher is a honest man.
We study English _______ Tuesdays and Fridays.
e) The Smiths bought an house in the center of Rio de Janeiro.
Janet is _______ the door waiting for her mother.

76. Put the words in order. Choose the correct alternative. The money is _______ the box. Just open it.

apples large two green beautiful a) in; at; on; on.

b) on; on; at; in.
c) on; on; in; at.
a) Two beautiful large green apples. d) on; in; at; in.
b) Two green large beautiful apples.
c) Two apples beautiful green large.
d) Apples two beautiful large green. 80. Choose the best answer that completes the sentences.
e) Two large green beautiful apples.
Jane _______________ a baby in the summer.
Bye for now. Perhaps _______________ you later.
77. Choose the alternative that best completes the following statement.
a) will have; I see.
My sister is _________ her thirties. She _________ long hair, and she _________ medium height. b) will have; I´m going to see.
She _________ contact lenses. c) is going to have; I´ll see.
d) are going to have; I´ll see.
e) is going to have; I´m going to see.
a) at; does; has; wears.
b) on; has; is; wears.
c) in; is; have; uses.
d) in; have; does; uses.
e) in; has; is; wears.

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2006/2007 147

GABARITO COMENTADO
61. Resolução:
a) Ele já percebeu que não consegue ficar sem verificar seus emails diariamente, que já
está dependente dessa rotina.
b) Correta. Está perfeitamente ciente de que está viciado em verificar seus emails.
c) No texto não faz nenhuma referência às crianças, apenas a pessoas adultas.
d) Cuidado com essa alternativa, ela é uma pegadinha. “Não achava que iria levar anos
para quebrar o hábito de verificar os emails” está INCORRETO, pois ele conclui que é
impossível quebrar tal hábito, que ele não conseguirá quebrar.
e) Ele não acredita que poderá ficar sem verificar o email dele e se livrar de tal hábito.
62. Resolução:
“... whole hours can go missing” = horas inteiras podem ser perdidas.
Tal tradução diz exatamente o mesmo que é dito na alternativa C.
63. Resolução:
Correta. Mensagens não importantes/ sem importancia
“There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
Junk = porcaria / besteira ; junk mail = emails com bobagens, nada importantes
SPAM = programas que se recebe por email e direcionam para outras páginas de internet,
geralmente relacionados à vendas de produtos. Na maioria das caixas de email atuais já são
automaticamente direcionados para a lixeira devido à sua insignificância.
Ela não nenhuma mensagem do escritor da matéria. De acordo com o texto “There was
nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
Junk = porcaria / besteira ; junk mail = emails com bobagens, nada importantes
SPAM = programas que se recebe por email e direcionam para outras páginas de internet,
geralmente relacionados à vendas de produtos. Na maioria das caixas de email atuais já são
automaticamente direcionados para a lixeira devido à sua insignificância.
Ela não encontrou nenhum convite para jantar. De acordo com o texto “There was nothing in
her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
Junk = porcaria / besteira ; junk mail = emails com bobagens, nada importantes
148 2006/2007 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
SPAM = programas que se recebe por email e direcionam para outras páginas de internet,
geralmente relacionados à vendas de produtos. Na maioria das caixas de email atuais já são
automaticamente direcionados para a lixeira devido à sua insignificância.
Na caixa de emails dela haviam várias mensagens, embora nenhuma delas fosse importante.
De acordo com o texto “There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
Junk = porcaria / besteira ; junk mail = emails com bobagens, nada importantes
SPAM = programas que se recebe por email e direcionam para outras páginas de internet,
geralmente relacionados à vendas de produtos. Na maioria das caixas de email atuais já são
automaticamente direcionados para a lixeira devido à sua insignificância.
Ela não recebeu nenhuma mensagem do tio dela, embora o autor do texto brinque com tal
possibilidade. De acordo com o texto, “There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and
other spam”.
Junk = porcaria / besteira ; junk mail = emails com bobagens, nada importantes
SPAM = programas que se recebe por email e direcionam para outras páginas de internet,
geralmente relacionados à vendas de produtos. Na maioria das caixas de email atuais já são
automaticamente direcionados para a lixeira devido à sua insignificância.
64. Resolução:
a) Ela não voou para o Panamá porque o cruzeiro estava lhe fazendo passar mal. Ela pegou
um helicóptero do cruzeiro onde se encontrava para a Lan House mais próxima, pois no
cruzeiro não era fornecido acesso à internet e ela sentia a necessidade de verificar seus
emails.
b) Ela não se arrependeu em momento algum de ter fretado o helicóptero. Mesmo
percebendo que em sua caixa de email não havia nada de importante, ela considerou que
valeu a pena.
c) Ela própria fretou o helicóptero, pois queria verificar seus emails e o cruzeiro não fornecia
serviço de internet.
d) Não havia nenhum problema com o cruzeiro. Ela pegou um helicóptero do cruzeiro onde
ela estava para a Lan House mais próxima, pois no cruzeiro não era fornecido acesso à
internet e ela sentia a necessidade de verificar seus emails.
e) Correta. Ficou satisfeita de ter fretado o helicóptero para ir à um “café”/ lan house para
verificar seus emails.
65. Resolução:
a) Correta. LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
b) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
 Afirmativa: YOU ARE; Interrogativa ARE YOU … é relativo a Simple Present. amado. O sujeito da ação é representado por SHE (Juliet), um SUBJECT PRONOUN,
c) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU. enquanto quem sofre a é representado por HE (Romeo), um OBJECT PRONOUN.
e) A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR enquanto a
Afirmativa: YOU ARE; Interrogativa ARE YOU … é relativo a Simple Present. YOU IS é
segunda lacuna deve ser representada por um pronome que sofre a ação de ser amado.
completamente incorreta!
HE e SHE são ambos pronomes relativos a sujeito que faz a ação.
d) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
WAS é referente à HE, SHE e IT.
68. Resolução:
e) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
AM é relativo à I e é SIMPLE PRESENT. a) WHOM – utilizado para se referir “quem” em função de objeto. No caso da alternativa, a
lacuna está se referindo à teoria que também está em função de sujeito na frase em
destaque entre vírgulas e não seria adequado.
66. Resolução:
b) Correta. WHICH – utilizado para escolhas e também para se equivaler a CUJO(A) ou
CUJOS(AS). Na frase em análise obteríamos a seguinte tradução: “Einstein, cuja a teoria
a) Na lacuna da alternativa 3 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra
é muito famosa, não era Americano”.
SUPERSTITION. Superstition é uma palavra abstrata e por isso considerada incontável. O
c) Correta.
quantifier utilizado para palavras incontáveis é MUCH e não MANY.
d) WHAT = o que. Não é possível ser empregado corretamente nessa sentença.
b) Na lacuna da alternativa 1 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra AREAS.
e) WHO - utilizado para se referir “quem” em função de sujeito. No caso da alternativa, a
Areas é uma palavra considerada contável. O quantifier utilizado para palavras contáveis
lacuna está se referindo à teoria e não ao sujeito principal da sentença maior, Einstein.
é MANY e não MUCH.
c) Na lacuna da alternativa 3 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra WATER.
Water é uma palavra considerada incontável. O quantifier utilizado para palavras 69. Resolução:
incontáveis é MUCH e não MANY.
d) Correta. Tradução da sentença:
e) Na lacuna da alternativa 4 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra PEOPLE.
a) “A coruja, uma ave de rapina da Ordem Strigiforme, é sobretudo noturna, ____________
People é uma palavra considerada contável, sendo o plural irregular da palavra person. O
uma cabeça larga/ampla _______ olhos largos. Existem várias corujas ________ nas
quantifier utilizado para palavras contáveis é MANY e não MUCH.
terras pantanosas do Mato Grosso.”
b) “A coruja (...) é sobretudo noturna e uma cabeça larga com olhos largos” é uma sentença
67. Resolução: que não faz sentido gramatical. Correta.
c) Of = DE no sentido de pertencer a/ ser de. Não se empregaria adequadamente à lacuna
a) A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR. O sujeito da ação em questão.
é representado por um SUBJECT PRONOUN e HIM é um OBJECT PRONOUN. d) Of = DE no sentido de pertencer a/ ser de. Não se empregaria adequadamente à lacuna
b) A conversa é entre Romeo e Juliet, um homem e uma mulher, a lógica é que um deles em questão.
esteja realizando a ação de amar e o outro de ser amado. SHE – ela, fazendo a ação; e) “A coruja (...) é sobretudo noturna e uma cabeça”já seria uma sentença que não faz
HER – ela, recebendo a ação. sentido gramatical. Caso o concursando não tenha notado essa questão, o uso da palavra
c) Correta. A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR enquanto into = movimento para dentro de algo no preenchimento da segunda lacuna deixaria
a segunda lacuna deve ser representada por um pronome que sofre a ação de ser completamente evidente a impossibilidade de tal alternativa ser considerada a correta.
amado. O sujeito da ação é representado por HE (Romeo), um SUBJECT PRONOUN,
enquanto quem sofre a é representado por HER (Juliet), um OBJECT PRONOUN.
d) Correta. A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR enquanto
a segunda lacuna deve ser representada por um pronome que sofre a ação de ser

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2006/2007 149

70. Resolução: d) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é
referente ao rádio e ao som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. Apesar de
a) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma HIS ser um possessivo, não seria possível utilizá-lo como substituto à palavra rádio, que é
sentença que já possui sujeito e verbo, faltando apenas o complemento da frase que, no um objeto. Objetos são substituídos pelos pronomes IT e seus relativos, no caso do
caso, deveria ser um objeto. Quem gosta, gosta DE ALGUMA COISA – no caso, seus possessivo é ITS.
sapatos. e) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é
Sapatos = They. They = sujeito - se transformado para objetdo = them. referente ao rádio e ao som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. Apesar de
b) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma HER ser um tipo de possessivo, não seria possível utilizá-lo como substituto à palavra
sentença que já possui sujeito e verbo, faltando apenas o complemento da frase que, no rádio, que é um objeto. Objetos são substituídos pelos pronomes IT e seus relativos, no
caso, deveria ser um objeto. Quem gosta, gosta DE ALGUMA COISA – no caso, seus caso do possessivo é ITS.
sapatos.
Sapatos = They. They = sujeito - se transformado para objetdo = them.
72. Resolução:
IT é utilizado para coisas e animais quando na terceira pessoa do singular e não do
plural.
a) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. MORE é comparativo e não costuma vir
c) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma
precedido de artigo definido (the).
sentença que já possui sujeito e verbo, faltando apenas o complemento da frase que, no
b) Correta.
caso, deveria ser um objeto. Quem gosta, gosta DE ALGUMA COISA – no caso, seus
c) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. MORE…THAN é comparativo.
sapatos.
d) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. AS…AS é comparativo de igualdade.
Sapatos = They. They = sujeito - se transformado para objetdo = them.
e) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. MOST é designativo de superlativo, mas para
Theirs = possessivo.
ficar correto precisar ser precedido de artigo definido (the).
d) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma
sentença que já possui sujeito e verbo, faltando apenas o complemento da frase que, no
caso, deveria ser um objeto. Quem gosta, gosta DE ALGUMA COISA – no caso, seus 73. Resolução:
sapatos.
Sapatos = They. They = sujeito - se transformado para objetdo = them. a) Luggage é uma palavra incontável. Palavras incontáveis não utilizam artigo indefinido.
Their = possessivo. b) Luggage é uma palavra incontável. Palavras incontáveis não utilizam artigo indefinido.
e) Correta. c) Para interrogativas e negativas utiliza-se ANY, para afirmativas utiliza-se SOME. No caso
da lacuna em questão, pretendemos completar uma interrogativa.
d) Correta.
71. Resolução:
e) Para interrogativas e negativas utiliza-se ANY, para afirmativas utiliza-se SOME. NO é
usado para se referir a NENHUM. “Do you have no luggage?” poderia ser traduzido como
a) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é
“Você tem nenhuma bagagem?”, o que é gramaticalmente incorreto tanto em português
referente ao rádio e ao som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. O som do
quanto em inglês.
rádio quer dizer posse e, apesar de IT ser o pronome correto para substituir rádio, é
incorreto em casos de posse. Em casos de posse utilizamos ITS.
b) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é 74. Resolução:
referente ao rádio e ao som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. Apesar de
their ser um possessivo, não seria possível utilizá-lo como substituto à palavra rádio, que a) Bob and I = WE. Na conjugação do verbo TO BE temos WE ARE.
é um objeto. Objetos são substituídos pelos pronomes IT e seus relativos, no caso do b) My family and John = They. Na conjugação do verbo TO BE temos THEY ARE.
possessivo é ITS. c) Correta.
c) Correta. d) Melissa and you = YOU. Na conjugação do verbo TO BE temos YOU ARE.

150 2006/2007 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]

 e) Bob`s is - neste pedaço temos duas possibilidades de erro:
1ª - se ‟s for abreviação de IS - teríamos então 2 verbos TO BE seguidos, o que é
gramaticalmente incorreto.
2ª – se ‟ s for possessivo – não se utiliza verbo TO BE após possessivo.
75. Resolução:
a) Utilizamos “A” diante de palavras inicias com U e som de IU. É uma excessão à regra de
que “A” é utilizado apenas diante de palavras iniciadas com som de consoante.
b) Regra padrão de artigo indefinido: “A” é utilizado apenas diante de palavras iniciadas com
som de consoante. Orange inicia com som de vogal, logo, não pode utilizar o artigo
indefinido “A”.
c) Correta.
d) Utilizamos “AN” diante de palavras inicias com H mudo/sem som, pois esta se torna uma
palavra que, apesar de iniciar com uma letra que pode ser considerada consoante, possui
som inicial de vogal.A regra padrão de artigo indefinido é que “AN” é utilizado apenas
diante de palavras iniciadas com som de vogal – veja bem o detalhe, é SOM DE VOGAL e
não com uma letra que seja vogal.
e) A regra padrão de artigo indefinido é que “AN” é utilizado apenas diante de palavras
iniciadas com som de vogal. HOUSE possui som inicial de R, ou seja, som de consoante e
por isso deveria vir precedido do artigo indefinido „A‟ e não „AN‟.
76. Resolução:
a) Correta.
A ordem correta dos adjetivos deve ser : determinante (no caso, a quantidade) >
observação (bonito/feio/gostoso/desagradável...) > características físicas (essas seguem
uma ordem interna específica: tamanho, forma, idade/antiguidade, cor) > ... > nome
que está sendo adjetivado.
b) Na frase em questão, tirando o determinante e o nome a ser adjetivado (apples), os
adjetivos estão em ordens invertidas. A frase correta sertia “Two beautiful large green
apples”.
A ordem correta dos adjetivos deve ser : determinante (no caso, a quantidade) >
observação (bonito/feio/gostoso/desagradável...) > características físicas (essas seguem
uma ordem interna específica: tamanho, forma, idade/antiguidade, cor) > ... > nome
que está sendo adjetivado.
c) Na frase em questão, o nome a ser adjetivado está vindo após o determinante de
quantidade e antes de todos os outros adjetivos, o que a torna incorreta.
A ordem correta dos adjetivos deve ser : determinante (no caso, a quantidade) >
observação (bonito/feio/gostoso/desagradável...) > características físicas (essas seguem
uma ordem interna específica: tamanho, forma, idade/antiguidade, cor) > ... > nome
que está sendo adjetivado.
d) Na frase em questão o nome a ser adjetivado está vindo antes de todos os adjetivos, o
que a toda incorreta, já que os adjetivos devem sempre vir antes do nome a ser
adjetivado.
A ordem correta dos adjetivos deve ser : determinante (no caso, a quantidade) >
observação (bonito/feio/gostoso/desagradável...) > características físicas (essas seguem
uma ordem interna específica: tamanho, forma, idade/antiguidade, cor) > ... > nome
que está sendo adjetivado.
e) Na frase em questão, tirando o determinante e o nome a ser adjetivado (apples), os
adjetivos estão em ordens invertidas. A frase correta seria “Two beautiful large green
f) apples”.
77. Resolução:
Para facilitar ao aluno localizar erros em sentenças que possuam muitas lacunas, sugerimos os
alunos deixarem as lacunas que consideram mais difíceis para serem analisadas por último,
assim, já terão eliminado várias alternativas e talvez nem precisem utilizar seus conhecimentos
para decidir algo naquela lacuna. Como a maior parte dos alunos costuma relatar dificuldades
em preposições, deixaremos a análise das preposições da primeira lacuna como a última a ser
vista, apenas se necessária como critério de desempate entre alternativas com todas as outras
lacunas idênticas.
Lacuna 2 – “she does long hair” = “ela faz cabelo longo”, essa frase não faz sentido e é
gramaticamente incorreta nesse tipo de sentença. Atente ao fato de ser NESSE TIPO DE
SENTENÇA - se estivéssemos falando de um cabeleireiro em um salão a frase poderia ser
considerada correta ao se relacionar que “fazer o cabelo longo” seria equivalente a fazer
penteados, cortes, tinturas ou coisas do gênero.
FIQUEM ATENTOS À PEGADINHA:
O erro da 3ª lacuna pode passar desapercebido para muitos concursandos distraídos e, caso
esse fosse o único erro de toda a alternativa, poderia lhe custar a questão. “she has medium
height” = “ela tem altura mediana”.
Diferente do Português, no Inglês a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa tenha e sim
algo que ela seja. A explicação para isso é que a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa
possui e possa deixar de possuir ou alterar conforme seu desejo, é algo que faz parte dela.
[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2006/2007 151
Não é opcional. Então, assim como para idade, para altura utilizamos verbo TO BE e não
verbo TO HAVE, fazendo com que a frase correta seja “she IS medium height”.
DICA: Nesta alternativa as lacunas 2, 3 e 4 estão corretas. Logo, a única forma de se
descobrir se ela está correta ou incorreta é utilizando seus conhecimentos sobre preposição e
completando a lacuna 1. Sugerimos aos alunos que, nestes casos, antes de “se torturarem”
tentando lembrar algo sobre preposições que talvez os deixem em dúvida, verifiquem se há
alguma outra alternativa com as lacunas 2, 3 e 4 corretas também.
Caso não haja, esta alternativa será a correta e a tática terá lhe poupado preciosos segundos
em uma prova de concurso.
Caso haja, seus conhecimentos terão que ser utilizados para decidir em qual das duas ou mais
está a alternativa correta.
EXPLICAÇÃO DA ALTERNATIVA: Utilizamos a preposição IN e não a preposição ON quando
nos referimos à anos ou décadas. Na lacuna em questão estamos dizendo que ela estava em
sua 30ª década de vida, podendo ter qualquer idade entre 30 e 39.
Lacuna 2 – “she is long hair” = “ela é cabelo longo”. O cabelo é algo que pode ser mudado a
qualquer momento, mediante o desejo da pessoa. Ele não faz parte do que ela é e sim de
como ela está, ele é algo que ela tem. Por este motivo o correto seria utilizar HAS no lugar de
IS.
Caso o aluno não tenha percebido o erro na 2ª lacuna, uma forma fácil de perceber o erro da
alternativa é na 3ª lacuna, quando eles colocam “she have” como alternativa correta.
Ignorante a pegadinha existente na lacuna, o fato de associar SHE – terceira pessoa do
singular – à HAVE torna a alternativa gritantemente incorreta. A conjugação correta seria SHE
HAS. Agora... FIQUEM ATENTOS À PEGADINHA:
Outro erro na 3ª lacuna pode passar desapercebido para muitos concursandos distraídos e,
caso esse fosse o único erro de toda a alternativa, poderia lhe custar a questão. “she has
medium height” = “ela tem altura mediana”.
Diferente do Português, no Inglês a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa tenha e sim
algo que ela seja. A explicação para isso é que a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa
possui e possa deixar de possuir ou alterar conforme seu desejo, é algo que faz parte dela.
Não é opcional. Então, assim como para idade, para altura utilizamos verbo TO BE e não
verbo TO HAVE, fazendo com que a frase correta seja “she IS medium height”.
FIQUEM ATENTO À PEGADINHA – PARTE 2:
Na lacuna 4 temos USE no lugar de WEAR. Qual seria a diferença do uso entre um e outro?
Por que USE não poderia ser usado?
Utilizamos USE quando nos referimos a “usar” algo e WEAR quando nos referimos à
“vestir”algo. Em português “usamos” óculos, chapeis, lentes de contato... mas em Inglês, tudo
152 2006/2007 | [ Curso Preparatório Cidade]
que vai no corpo é vestido e não usado. Logo, em Inglês VESTIMOS óculos, chapéus, LENTES
DE COTNATO, perfumes, maquiagens...
ATENÇÃO – não é porque em Inglês se fala/escreve de forma diferente que em Português que
na hora de fazer uma tradução se colocará “she wears contact lenses” = “ela veste lentes de
contato”. Em uma tradução será posto do Inglês para seu equivalente dito em Português e
não seu equivalente literal, logo teremos “she wears contact lenses” = “ela usa lentes de
contato”.
Lacuna 2 – A conjugação correta para o verbo TO HAVE na terceira pessoa (HE, SHE ou IT) é
HAS. Então, o correto seria SHE HAS.
FIQUEM ATENTOS À PEGADINHA:
Na lacuna 4 temos USE no lugar de WEAR. Qual seria a diferença do uso entre um e outro?
Por que USE não poderia ser usado?
Utilizamos USE quando nos referimos a “usar” algo e WEAR quando nos referimos à
“vestir”algo. Em português “usamos” óculos, chapeis, lentes de contato... mas em Inglês, tudo
que vai no corpo é vestido e não usado. Logo, em Inglês VESTIMOS óculos, chapéus, LENTES
DE COTNATO, perfumes, maquiagens...
ATENÇÃO – não é porque em Inglês se fala/escreve de forma diferente que em Português que
na hora de fazer uma tradução se colocará “she wears contact lenses” = “ela veste lentes de
contato”. Em uma tradução será posto do Inglês para seu equivalente dito em Português e
não seu equivalente literal, logo teremos “she wears contact lenses” = “ela usa lentes de
contato”.
Correta.
78. Resolução:
a) Last night = passado. David and Sue = They. THEY WERE.
b) Last night = passado. David and Sue = They. THEY WERE. They are = present.
c) David and Sue = They. They are. Is é utilizado para a Terceira pessoa do singular. Esse é
o primeiro erro. O segundo erro é que a opção dá um verbo no presente, enquanto a
frase está no passado (last night).
d) Be é a forma infinitiva do verbo. A frase está no passado e, portanto, o verbo deveria
estar conjugado na forma de passado. THEY WERE.
e) Correta.
79. Resolução: marcar a resposta que você considera a mais correta. No caso dessa questão, sugeriríamos
que marcassem a alternativa B pois, apesar da questão ter sido anulada, poderia ter sido
IN = dentro. Se o yate estivese “in the water”, ele estaria dentro da água e portanto estaria alegado pela banca que o fato dela estar grávida não implica necessariamente que ela terá o
afundado. bebê naquele mês pois o bebê pode nascer prematura ou ela pode perder o bebê.

Caso o concursando não consiga perceber como completar a primeira lacuna, existe a Jane = SHE. Conjugação do verbo to be para she = SHE IS.
possibilidade de se descobrir o erro nessa alternativa pelas lacunas 2 e 3. Correta. “To be going to” é um futuro com 100% e, com isso, se aplica às duas lacunas na
Na lacuna 2 temos os dias da semana e com dias da semana utilizamos a preposição ON e não questão.
a preposição AT. DICA: Caso uma questão como esta caia em sua prova (onde as alternativas B, C e D
Na lacuna 3 temos que Jane está à porta, logo ela está AT the door e não ON the door – que possuem respostas válidas e que podem ser consideradas corretas), dê preferência para
seria NA porta (pendurada ou algo assim). marcar a resposta que você considera a mais correta. No caso dessa questão, sugeriríamos
que marcassem a alternativa B pois, apesar da questão ter sido anulada, poderia ter sido
Correta.
alegado pela banca que o fato dela estar grávida não implica necessariamente que ela terá o
Lacuna 3 – “in the door” = “dentro da porta”. Não há como a pessoa estar dentro de uma bebê naquele mês pois o bebê pode nascer prematura ou ela pode perder o bebê.
porta.
O Yate está sob a água e por isso a preposição adequada na primeira lacuna é ON e não AT.
Caso o concursando não consiga perceber o erro no emprego da preposição da primeira
lacuna, pode optar pela 2ª lacuna, que apresenta a preposição IN para dias da semana. Como
já foi possível aprender durante os estudos, com dias da semana se utiliza a preposição ON e
não a preposição IN.

80. Resolução:

Lacuna 2 – “later” nesta sentence é igual à “depois”. “depois” é designativo de futuro, logo o
tempo verbal utilizado para completar a lacuna 2 deveria ser no futuro e está no presente.
Correta. “Will have”é um futuro sem 100% e “to be going to” é um futuro com 100% .
Independente de ter 100% certeza ou não ambos estão no futuro e, com isso, se aplicam às
duas lacunas na questão.
DICA: Caso uma questão como esta caia em sua prova (onde as alternativas B, C e D
possuem respostas válidas e que podem ser consideradas corretas), dê preferência para
marcar a resposta que você considera a mais correta. No caso dessa questão, sugeriríamos
que marcassem a alternativa B pois, apesar da questão ter sido anulada, poderia ter sido
alegado pela banca que o fato dela estar grávida não implica necessariamente que ela terá o
bebê naquele mês pois o bebê pode nascer prematura ou ela pode perder o bebê.
Correta. “To be going to” é um futuro com 100% e “will have”é um futuro sem 100%.
Independente de ter 100% certeza ou não ambos estão no futuro e, com isso, se aplicam às
duas lacunas na questão.
DICA: Caso uma questão como esta caia em sua prova (onde as alternativas B, C e D
possuem respostas válidas e que podem ser consideradas corretas), dê preferência para

[Curso Preparatório Cidade] | 2006/2007 153